Chapter7 Substructure Design PDF

Chapter 7 Substructure Design
Contents
7.1 General Substructure Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Foundation Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.2 Foundation Design Limit States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.3 Seismic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.4 Substructure and Foundation Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.5 Concrete Class for Substructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.6 Foundation Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.7 Scour Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2 Foundation Modeling for Seismic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.2.2 Substructure Elastic Dynamic Analysis Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.2.3 Bridge Model Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.2.4 Bridge Model Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.2.5 Deep Foundation Modeling Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.2.6 Lateral Analysis of Piles and Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.2.7 Spread Footing Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.3 Column Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

7.3.1 General Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.3.2 Slenderness Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7.3.3 Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.3.4 Column Silos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7.3.5 Column Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.3.6 Column Hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7.3.7 Reduced Column Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.4 Crossbeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

7.4.1 General Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7.5 Abutment Design and Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

7.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7.5.2 Abutments Supported By Mechanically-Stabilized Earth Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7.5.3 Embankment at Abutments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
7.5.4 Abutment Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7.5.5 Temporary Construction Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
7.5.6 Abutment Bearings and Girder Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
7.5.7 Abutment Expansion Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.5.8 Open Joint Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7.5.9 Construction Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
7.5.10 Abutment Wall Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
7.5.11 Drainage and Backfilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-i
July 2019
7.6 Abutment Wing Walls and Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

7.6.1 Traffic Barrier Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.6.2 Wing Wall Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.6.3 Wing Wall Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.7 Footing Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69

7.7.1 General Footing Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7.7.2 Loads and Load Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7.7.3 Geotechnical Report Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
7.7.4 Spread Footing Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
7.7.5 Pile-Supported Footing Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
7.8 Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79

7.8.1 Axial Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
7.8.2 Structural Design and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
7.9 Piles and Piling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

7.9.1 Pile Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
7.9.2 Single Pile Axial Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
7.9.3 Block Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
7.9.4 Pile Uplift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
7.9.5 Pile Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
7.9.6 Structural Design and Detailing of CIP Concrete Piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
7.9.7 Pile Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
7.9.8 Pile Lateral Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
7.9.9 Battered Piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
7.9.10 Pile Tip Elevations and Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
7.9.11 Plan Pile Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
7.10 Concrete-Filled Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

7.10.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
7.10.2 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
7.10.3 CFST-to-Cap Annular Ring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
7.10.4 CFST-to-Cap Reinforced Concrete Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-109
7.10.5 RCFST-to-Column and CFST-to Column Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
7.10.6 Partially-filled CFST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-111
7.10.7 Construction Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-112
7.10.8 Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-113
7.11 Bridge Standard Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-115
Page 7-ii WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

July 2019
Substructure Design Chapter 7
7.12 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116

Appendix 7.3-A2 Noncontact Lap Splice Length Column to Shaft Connections . . . . . . . . 7-117
Appendix 7-B1 Linear Spring Calculation Method II (Technique I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-119
Appendix 7-B2 Pile Footing Matrix Example Method II (Technique I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-124
Appendix 7-B3 Non-Linear Springs Method III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-127
7.99 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-128
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-iii

July 2019
Page 7-iv WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

July 2019
7.1 General Substructure Considerations

Note that in the following guidelines where reference is made to AASHTO LRFD the item
can be found in the current AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (LRFD). And for
any reference to AASHTO Seismic, the item can be found in the current AASHTO Guide
Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design (SEISMIC).
7.1.1 Foundation Design Process

A flowchart is provided in which illustrates the overall design process utilized by
the WSDOT Bridge and Structures Office to accomplish an LRFD foundation design. Note
this process is also outlined in the Geotechnical Design Manual Section 8.2. The Bridge and
Structures Office (BSO), the Geotechnical Branch (GB) and the Hydraulics Branch (HB)
have been abbreviated. The steps in the flowchart are defined as follows:
A. Scoping Level Design
This phase of the design process involves the region requesting initial bridge options
and costs for a future project. Depending on the complexity of the project, this phase
could include a Type, Size and Location (TS&L) Report.
This design step may result in informal communication between the BSO and the
GB and/or HB with the request for preliminary information and recommendations.
The level of communication will depend on the available information provided
by the region and the complexity of the project. The type of information that may be
received from the GB and HB are as follows:
• Anticipated soil site conditions.
• Maximum embankment slopes.
• Possible foundation types and geotechnical hazards such as liquefaction.
• Scour potential for piers if a water crossing.
• Potential for future migration of a stream or river crossing.
In general, these recommendations rely on existing site data. Site borings may not
be available and test holes are drilled later. The GB provides enough information
to select potential foundation types for an initial scoping level or TS&L level plan
and estimate.
B. Develop Site Data and Preliminary Bridge Plan
In the second phase, the BSO obtains site data from the region, see Section 2.2,
and develops the preliminary bridge plan. The preliminary pier locations determine
soil boring locations at this time. The GB and/or the HB may require the following
information to continue their preliminary design.
• Structure type and magnitude of settlement the structure can tolerate (both total
and differential).
• At abutments – Approximate maximum top of foundation elevation.
• At interior piers – The initial size, shape and number of columns and how they
are configured with the foundation (e.g., whether a single foundation element
supports each column, or one foundation element supports multiple columns)
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-1

July 2019
• At water crossings – Pier scour depth, if known, and any potential for migration of
the water crossing in the future. Typically, the GB and the BSO should coordinate
pursuing this information with the HB.
• Any known structural constraints that affect the foundation type, size, or location.
• Any known constraints that affect the soil resistance (utilities, construction
staging, excavation, shoring, and falsework).
C. Preliminary Foundation Design
The third phase is a request by the BSO for a preliminary foundation memorandum.
The GB memo will provide preliminary soil data required for structural analysis
and modeling. This includes any subsurface conditions and the preliminary
subsurface profile.
The concurrent geotechnical work at this stage includes:
• Completion of detailed boring logs and laboratory test data.
• Development of foundation type, soil capacity, and foundation depth.
• Development of static/seismic soil properties and ground acceleration.
• Recommendations for constructability issues.
The BO may also request the HB to provide preliminary scour design
recommendations if the structure is located over a water crossing.
D. Structural Analysis and Modeling
In the fourth phase, the BSO performs a structural analysis of the superstructure
and substructure using a bridge model and preliminary soil parameters. Through
this modeling, the designer determines loads and sizes for the foundation based on
the controlling LRFD limit states. Structural and geotechnical design continues to
investigate constructability and construction staging issues during this phase.
In order to produce a final geotechnical report, the BSO provides the following
structural feedback to the Geotechnical Engineer:
• Foundation loads for service, strength, and extreme limit states.
• Foundation size/diameter and depth required to meet structural design.
• Foundation details that could affect the geotechnical design of the foundations.
• Foundation layout plan.
• Assumed scour depths for each limit state (if applicable)
For water crossings, the BSO also provides the information listed above to the
hydraulics engineer to verify initial scour and hydraulics recommendations are still
suitable for the site.
(See Chapter 2 for examples of pile design data sheets that shall be filled out and
submitted to the Geotechnical Engineer at the early stage of design.)
Page 7-2 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

July 2019
E. Final Foundation Design

The last phase completes the geotechnical report and allows the final structural
design to begin. The preliminary geotechnical assumptions are checked and
recommendations are modified, if necessary. The final report is complete to a
PS&E format since the project contract will contain referenced information in the
geotechnical report, such as:
• All geotechnical data obtained at the site (boring logs, subsurface profiles,
and laboratory test data).
• All final foundation recommendations.
• Final constructability and staging recommendations.
The designer reviews the final report for new information and confirms the
preliminary assumptions. With the foundation design complete, the final bridge
structural design and detailing process continues to prepare the bridge plans.
Following final structural design, the structural designer shall follow up with
the geotechnical designer to ensure that the design is within the limits of the
geotechnical report.
7.1.2 Foundation Design Limit States

The controlling limit states for WSDOT projects for substructure design are described as
follows:
Strength I Relating to the normal vehicular use
Strength III Relating to the bridge exposed to wind
Strength V Relating to the normal vehicular use and wind
Extreme-Event I Relating to earthquake
Service I Relating to normal operational use and wind
7.1.3 Seismic Design

The seismic design of all substructures shall be in accordance with the AASHTO Seismic -
except as noted otherwise.
7.1.4 Substructure and Foundation Loads

Figure 7.1.4-1 below provides a common basis of understanding for load location and
orientations for substructure design. This figure also shows elevations required for
abutment and substructure design. Note that for shaft and some pile foundation designs,
the shaft or pile may form the column as well as the foundation element.
Spread footings usually have a design orientation normal to the footing. Since bridge
loads are longitudinal and transverse, skewed superstructure loads are converted (using
vector components) to normal and parallel footing loads. Deep foundation analysis usually
has a normal/parallel orientation to the pier in order to simplify group effects.
Substructure elements are to carry all of the loads specified in AASHTO Seismic and
AASHTO LRFD. Selecting the controlling load conditions requires good judgment to
minimize design time. All anticipated dead load (DC) conditions shall be accounted for
during a substructure design. Sidesway effect shall be included where it tends to increase
stresses. For live loads (LL), the dynamic allowance (IM) shall be applied in accordance
with AASHTO LRFD Section 3.6.2 and is not included in the design of buried elements of
the substructure. Portions of the abutments in contact with the soil are considered buried
elements.

July 2019
Figure 7.1.1-1 Overall Design Process for LRFD Foundation Design



 



 

 
   
 


 

 
 
   
 

 




July 2019
Bridge design shall consider construction loads to ensure structural stability and prevent
members from overstress. For example, temporary construction loads caused by placing
all of the precast girders on one side of a crossbeam can overload a single column pier.
Construction loads shall also include live loads from potential construction equipment.
The plans shall show a construction sequence and/or notes to avoid unacceptable
loadings.
On curved bridges, the substructure design shall consider the eccentricity resulting from
the difference in girder lengths and the effects of torsion. When superstructure design
uses a curved girder theory, such as the V-Load Method, the reactions from such analysis
must be included in the loads applied to the substructure.
Figure 7.1.4-1 Substructure Directional Forces









 

7.1.5 Concrete Class for Substructure

The concrete class for all substructure elements shall be Class 4000. This includes
footings, pedestals, massive piers, columns, crossbeams, traffic barriers, and
retaining walls, wing walls, and curtain walls connected to the bridge substructure or
superstructure. Foundation seals shall be Class 4000W. Shafts and cast-in-place piles
shall be Class 5000P. Concrete Class 4000P may be used for elements other than
bridge foundations.

July 2019
7.1.6 Foundation Seals

A concrete seal within the confines of a cofferdam permits construction of a pier footing
and column in the dry. This type of underwater construction is practical to a water depth
of approximately 50 feet.
Seal concrete is placed underwater with the use of a tremie. A tremie is a long pipe
that extends to the bottom of the excavation and permits a head to be maintained on
the concrete during placement. After the concrete has been placed and has obtained
sufficient strength, the water within the cofferdam is removed. In Figure 7.1.6-1, some of
the factors that must be considered in designing a seal are illustrated.
Figure 7.1.6-1 Foundation Seal







 

 
 




 

A. General Seal Criteria

The normal high water elevation is defined as the highest water surface elevation
that may normally be expected to occur during a given time period. This elevation,
on the hydraulics data sheet, is obtained from discussions with local residents
or by observance of high water marks at the site. The normal high water is not related
to any flood condition.
1. Seal Vent Elevation
The Hydraulics Branch recommends a seal vent elevation in accordance with the
following criteria.
i. Construction Time Period Not Known
If the time period of the footing construction is not known, the vent
elevation reflects the normal high water elevation that might occur
at any time during the year.

July 2019
ii. Construction Time Period Known

If the time period of the footing construction can be anticipated, the
vent elevation reflects the normal high water elevation that might occur
during this time period. (If the anticipated time period of construction
is later changed, the Hydraulics Branch shall be notified and appropriate
changes made in the design.)
2. Scour Depth
The Hydraulics Branch determines the depth of the anticipated scour. The
bottom of footing, or bottom of seal if used, shall be no higher than the scour
depth elevation. After preliminary footing and seal thicknesses have been
determined, the bridge designer shall review the anticipated scour elevation with
the Hydraulics Branch to ensure that excessive depths are not used.
3. Foundation Elevation Recommended in Geotechnical Report
Based on the results obtained from test borings at the site, the Geotechnical
Engineer determines a foundation elevation, bearing capacity and settlement
criteria. If other factors control, such as scour or footing cover, the final footing
elevation shall be adjusted as required.
4. Unusual Conditions
Unusual site conditions such as rock formations or deep foundations require
special considerations in order to obtain the most optimum design. The proposed
foundation design/construction shall be discussed with both the Geotechnical
Branch and the Hydraulics Branch prior to final plan preparation.
B. Spread Footing Seals
The Geotechnical Branch will generally recommend whether a foundation seal may or
may not be required for construction. Bearing loads are the column moments applied
at the base of the footing and vertical load applied at the bottom of the seal. The seal
is sized for the soil bearing capacity. Overturning stability need only be checked at
the base of the pier footing.
1. When a Seal is Required During Construction
If the footing can be raised without violating cover requirements, the bottom
of the seal elevation shall be the lower of the scour elevation or the foundation
elevation as recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer. The bottom of the
seal may be lower than the scour elevation or foundation elevation due to cover
requirements. Spread footing final design shall include the dead load weight
of the seal.
2. When a Seal May Not Be Required for Construction
Both methods of construction are detailed in the plans when it is not clear if
a seal is required for construction. The plans must detail a footing with a seal
and an alternate without a seal. The plan quantities are based on the footing
designed with a seal. If the alternate footing elevation is different from the
footing with seal, it is also necessary to note on the plans the required changes in
rebar such as length of column bars, increased number of ties, etc. Note that this
requires the use of either General Special Provision (GSP) 6-02.3(6)B.OPT1.GB6
or 6-02.3(6)B.OPT2.GB6.

July 2019
C. Pile Footing Seals

The top of footing, or pedestal, is set by the footing cover requirements. The bottom
of seal elevation is based on the stream scour elevation determined by the Hydraulics
Branch. A preliminary analysis is made using the estimated footing and seal weight,
and the column moments and vertical load at the base of the footing to determine
the number of piles and spacing. The seal size shall be 1′-0″ larger than the footing all
around. If the seal is omitted during construction, the bottom of footing shall be set
at the scour elevation and an alternate design is made.
In general seal design requires determining a thickness such that the seal weight plus
any additional resistance provided by the bond stress between the seal concrete
and any piling is greater than the buoyant force (determined by the head of water
above the seal). If the bond stress between the seal concrete and the piling is used
to determine the seal thickness, the uplift capacity of the piles must be checked
against the loads applied to them as a result of the bond stress. The bond between
seal concrete and piles is typically assumed to be 10 psi. The minimum seal thickness
is 1′-6″.
7.1.7 Scour Requirements

All bridge foundations shall be protected from scour regardless of bridge type, location,
and usage. Scour at bridge foundations shall be designed by the bridge designers for
two conditions:
1. At Service and Strength Limit States: For the design flood for scour, the streambed
material in the scour prism above the total scour line shall be assumed to have
been removed for design conditions. The design flood storm surge, tide, or mixed
population flood shall be the more sever of the 100-year events or from an
overtopping flood of lesser recurrence interval.
2. At Extreme Limit State (Earthquake or Scour): For the check flood for scour, the
stability of the bridge foundation shall be designed for scour conditions resulting
from a designated flood storm surge, tide, or mixed population flood not to exceed
the 500-year event or from an overtopping flood of lesser recurrence interval. Excess
reserve beyond that required for stability under this condition is not necessary.
Unless otherwise specified, bridges shall be designed for the 100-year scour and shall
have a risk assessment for the potential for stream migration for the 500-year scour.
If the site conditions due to ice or debris near stream confluences dictate the use of
a more severe flood event for either the design or check flood for scour, the State
Hydraulics Engineer may recommend the use of such a flood event.
Where conditions dictate a need to construct the top of a footing or cap at an elevation
above the streambed, the bridge designers shall address the scour potential of the design,
based on the State Hydraulics Office analysis of the scour potential of the proposed
geometry of the foundation element.
Spread footings on soil or erodible rock shall be located by the bridge designers so that
the bottom of footing is below scour depths. Spread footings on scour-resistant rock shall
be constructed such that the integrity of the supporting rock is maintained.
Deep foundations such as piles or shafts may be selected by the bridge designers to
protect bridges from scour. Lower elevations should be considered for pile-supported

July 2019
footings where the piles could be damaged by erosion or corrosion from exposure due
to scour.
When fenders or other pier protection systems are used, the bridge designers shall
address the effects of such systems on pier scour and collection of debris, based on State
Hydraulics Office analysis of the hydraulic scour side-effects of the proposed systems.
When scour conditions expose all or a portion of the shaft cap, drilled shaft lateral
capacity shall be disregarded down to the depth of which the remaining soil in front of the
shaft reached two shaft diameters in width as shown in Figure 7.1.7-1.
Figure 7.1.7-1 Scour effects when all or a portion of a shaft cap is exposed
EARTH PRESSURE APPLIED TO

DIAPRAGM AND SHAFT CAP.
ORIGINAL GROUND CONDITION
SCOUR CONDITION
EARTH PRESSURE
APPLIED TO SHAFT.
DISREGARD SHAFT LATERAL
2B CAPACITY TO THIS DEPTH.
When scour conditions could uncover the shaft cap and expose the supporting shafts
below, soil arching conditions behind the shafts shall be assumed, requiring the full-
depth earth pressures to be applied from behind the shafts and shaft cap as shown in
Figure 7.1.7-2.
Figure 7.1.7-2 Scour effects when the shafts below a shaft cap are exposed

DIAPRAGM AND SHAFT CAP.
ASSUME BACKFIL REMAINS IN PLACE BEHIND
DIAPHRAGMS, SHAFT CAP, AND SHAFTS.
ORIGINAL GROUND CONDITION

PROJECTED AREA BEHIND
SHAFTS DUE TO SOIL ARCHING.
SCOUR OR STREAM
MIGRATION CONDITION.

July 2019
7.2 Foundation Modeling for Seismic Loads

7.2.1 General
Bridge modeling for seismic events shall be in accordance with requirements of the
AASHTO Seismic Section 5, “Analytical Models and Procedures.” The following guidance
is for elastic dynamic analysis. Refer to AASHTO Seismic Section 5.4 for other dynamic
analysis procedures.
7.2.2 Substructure Elastic Dynamic Analysis Procedure

The following is a general description of the iterative process used in an elastic dynamic
analysis. Note: An elastic dynamic analysis is needed to determine the displacement
demand, ∆D. The substructure elements are first designed using Strength, Service or
Extreme II limit state load cases prior to performing the dynamic analysis.
1. Build a Finite Element Model (FEM) to determine initial structure response (EQ+DC).
Assume that foundation springs are located at the bottom of the column.
A good initial assumption for fixity conditions of deep foundations (shafts or piles) is
to add 10′ to the column length in stiff soils and 15′ to the column in soft soils.
Use multi-mode response spectrum analysis to generate initial displacements.
2. Determine foundation springs using results from the seismic analysis in the
longitudinal and transverse directions. Note: The load combinations specified in
AASHTO Seismic Section 4.4 shall NOT be used in this analysis.
3. For spread footing foundations, the FEM will include foundation springs calculated
based on the footing size as calculated in Section 7.2.7. No iteration is required
unless the footing size changes. Note: For Site Classes A and B the AASHTO Seismic
allows spread footings to be modeled as rigid or fixed.
4. For deep foundation analysis, the FEM and the soil response program must agree
or converge on soil/structure lateral response. In other words, the moment, shear,
deflection, and rotation of the two programs should be within 10 percent. More
iteration will provide convergence much less than 1 percent. The iteration process to
converge is as follows:
a. Apply the initial FEM loads (moment and shear) to a p-y type soil response
program such as LPILE (including LPILE, LPILE-SHAFT and LPILE-GROUP).
b. Calculate foundation spring values for the FEM. Note: The load combinations
specified in AASHTO Seismic Section 4.4 shall not be used to determine
foundation springs.
c. Re-run the seismic analysis using the foundation springs calculated from the soil
response program. The structural response will change. Check to insure the FEM
results (M, V, Δ, θ, and spring values) in the transverse and longitudinal direction
are within 10 percent of the previous run. This check verifies the linear spring,
or soil response (calculated by the FEM) is close to the predicted nonlinear soil
behavior (calculated by the soil response program). If the results of the FEM and
the soil response program differ by more than 10 percent, recalculate springs and
repeat steps (a) thru (c) until the two programs converge to within 10 percent.

July 2019
Special note for single column/single shaft configuration: The seismic design
philosophy requires a plastic hinge in the substructure elements above ground
(preferably in the columns). Designers should note the magnitude of shear and
moment at the top of the shaft, if the column “zero” moment is close to a shaft
head foundation spring, the FEM and soil response program will not converge
and plastic hinging might be below grade.
Throughout the iteration process it is important to note that any set of springs
developed are only applicable to the loading that was used to develop them
(due to the inelastic behavior of the soil in the foundation program). This can
be a problem when the forces used to develop the springs are from a seismic
analysis that combines modal forces using a method such as the Complete
Quadratic Combination (CQC) or other method. The forces that result from
this combination are typically dominated by a single mode (in each direction as
shown by mass participation). This results in the development of springs and
forces that are relatively accurate for that structure. If the force combination
(CQC or otherwise) is not dominated by one mode shape (in the same direction),
the springs and forces that are developed during the above iteration process may
not be accurate.
LPILE may be used for a pile group supported footing. Pile or shaft foundation group
effects for lateral loading shall be taken as recommended in the project geotechnical
report. The liquefaction option in LPILE shall not be used (the liquefaction option shall be
disabled). The “Liquefied Sand” soil type shall not be used in LPILE.
7.2.3 Bridge Model Section Properties

In general, gross section properties may be assumed for all FEM members, except
concrete columns.
A. Cracked Properties for Columns
Effective section properties shall be in accordance with the AASHTO Seismic
Section 5.6.
B. Shaft Properties
The shaft concrete strength and construction methods lead to significant variation in
shaft stiffness described as follows.
For a stiff substructure response:
1. Use ƒ′c to calculate the modulus of elasticity.
2. Use Ig based on the maximum oversized shaft diameter allowed by Standard
Specifications Section 6-19.
3. When permanent casing is specified, increase shaft Ig using the transformed
area of a ¾″ thick casing, or the actual casing thickness for CFSTs. Since the
contractor will determine the thickness of the casing in non CFSTs, ¾″ is a
conservative estimate for design.

July 2019
For a soft substructure response:

1. Use ƒ′c to calculate the modulus of elasticity.
2. Use Ig based on the nominal shaft diameter. Alternatively, Ie may be used when it
is reflective of the actual load effects in the shaft.
3. When permanent casing is specified, increase I using the transformed area of
a ⅜″ thick casing , or use the casing thickness accounting for corrosion loss for
CFSTs.
Since the contractor will determine the thickness of the casing. In non CFSTs,
⅜″ is a minimum estimated thickness for design.
C. Cast-in-Place Pile Properties
For a stiff substructure response:
1. Use 1.5 ƒ′c to calculate the modulus of elasticity. Since aged concrete will
generally reach a compressive strength of at least 6 ksi when using a design
strength of 4 ksi, the factor of 1.5 is a reasonable estimate for an increase
in stiffness.
2. Use the pile Ig plus the transformed casing moment of inertia.
7 .2 .3-1 �� 1�� (7.2.3-1)
Where:
7 .3 .6-1 � �� 1E�3/E��
�� n =
s c
Use a steel casing

�� thickness
�� of ¼″ for piles less than 14″ in diameter, ⅜″ for piles 14″
��
to 18″
7 .4 .6-1 ��in�diameter, and ½″ for larger piles.
�
��
Note: These casing thicknesses are to be used for analysis only, the contractor is
��
responsible
7 .4 .6-2 �� for�selecting the casing thickness required to drive the piles.
� ��
� � �
��
For a soft substructure
�
response:
7 .4 .7-1
1. Use � �ƒ′
�� 1.0 � c�to
��calculate
� �� the modulus of elasticity.
2. Use
7 .8 .1-1 � �pile
�� Ig�, neglecting
� �� casing properties.
7.2.4 Bridge Model Verification

��
7 .8 .2-1 ��
As with any FEM, �� the designer should review the foundation behavior to ensure the
� ��
foundation springs correctly imitate the known boundary conditions and soil properties.
7 .9 .2-1 ��
Watch out for mismatch of units.
All finite element
7-B-1 .1 �� models must have dead load static reactions verified and boundary
��
�
conditions checked for errors. The static dead loads must be compared with hand
calculations
7-B-1 .2 or�
�� another
�� program’s results. For example, span member
� �� 1�� 3
�� end moment at
��
the supports can��be �released
�� at the piers to determine simple span�reactions. Then hand
calculated simple span dead load or PGsuper dead load and live load is used to verify
��
the model.��
7-B-1 .3 � � �� 1��
�
��
�
Crossbeam behavior must be checked to ensure the superstructure dead load is
� � ��
correctly distributing
7-B-1 .4 �� to substructure
� elements. A 3D bridge line model concentrates
� � �
the superstructure mass and stresses to a point in the crossbeam. Generally, interior
columns will have��
a much higher loading than the exterior columns. To improve the
7-B-1 .5A �11 � ��
model, crossbeam I∆g�should be increased to provide the statically correct column dead
��
Page 7-12 7-B-1 .5B �33 � �� WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19
�∆�
July 2019
��
7-B-1 .6A ��
load reactions. This may require increasing Ig by about 1000 times. Many times this is not
visible graphically and should be verified by checking numerical output. Note that most
finite element programs have the capability of assigning constraints to the crossbeam and
superstructure to eliminate the need for increasing the Ig of the crossbeam.
Seismic analysis may also be verified by hand calculations. Hand calculated fundamental
mode shape reactions will be approximate; but will ensure design forces are of the
same magnitude.
Designers should note that additional mass might have to be added to the bridge FEM for
seismic analysis. For example, traffic barrier mass and crossbeam mass beyond the last
column at piers may contribute significant weight to a two-lane or ramp structure.
7.2.5 Deep Foundation Modeling Methods

A designer must assume a foundation support condition that best represents the
foundation behavior. Deep foundation elements attempt to imitate the non-linear lateral
behavior of several soil layers interacting with the deep foundation. The bridge FEM then
uses the stiffness of the element to predict the seismic structural response. Models using
linear elements that are not based on non-linear soil-structure interaction are generally
considered inaccurate for soil response/element stress and are not acceptable. There are
three methods used to model deep foundations (FHWA Report No. 1P-87-6). Of these
three methods the Bridge and Structures Office prefers Method II for the majority of
bridges.
A. Method I – Equivalent Cantilever Column
This method assumes a point of fixity some depth below the bottom of the column
to model the stiffness of the foundation element. This shall only be used for a
preliminary model of the substructure response in SDC C and D.
B. Method II – Equivalent Base Springs
This method models deep foundations by using a {6x6} matrix. There are two
techniques used to generate the stiffness coefficients for the foundation matrix. The
equivalent stiffness coefficients assessed are valid only at the given level of loading.
Any changes of the shaft-head loads or conditions will require a new run for the
program to determine the new values of the equivalent stiffness coefficients. These
equivalent stiffness coefficients account for the nonlinear response of shaft materials
and soil resistance.
Technique I – The matrix is generated, using superposition, to reproduce the non-
linear behavior of the soil and foundation at the maximum loading. With Technique I,
10 terms are produced, 4 of these terms are “cross couples.” Soil response programs
analyze the non‑linear soil response. The results are then used to determine the
equivalent base springs. See Appendix 7-B1 for more information.
Technique II – The equivalent stiffness matrix generated using this technique
uses only the diagonal elements (no cross coupling stiffnesses). This technique is
recommended to construct the foundation stiffness matrix (equivalent base springs).
In Technique II the “cross couple” effects are internally accounted for as each stiffness
element and displacement is a function of the given Lateral load (P) and Moment
(M). Technique II uses the total response (Dt(P,M) qt(P,M)) to determine displacement
and equivalent soil stiffness, maintaining a nonlinear analysis. Technique I requires
superposition by adding the individual responses due to the lateral load and
July 2019
moment to determine displacement and soil stiffness. Using superposition to

combine two nonlinear responses results in errors in displacement and stiffness for
the total response as seen in the Figure 7.2.5-1. As illustrated, the total response
due to lateral load (P) and moment (M) does not necessarily equal the sum of the
individual responses.
C. Method III – Non-Linear Soil Springs
This method attaches non-linear springs along the length of deep foundation
members in a FEM model. See Appendix 7-B2 for more information. This method
has the advantage of solving the superstructure and substructure seismic response
simultaneously. The soil springs must be nonlinear PY curves and represent the soil/
structure interaction. This cannot be done during response spectrum analysis with
some FEM programs.
D. Spring Location (Method II)
The preferred location for a foundation spring is at the bottom of the column. This
includes the column mass in the seismic analysis. For design, the column forces are
provided by the FEM and the soil response program provides the foundation forces.
Springs may be located at the top of the column. However, the seismic analysis
will not include the mass of the columns. The advantage of this location is the soil/
structure analysis includes both the column and foundation design forces.
Figure 7.2.5-1 Limitations on the Technique I (Superposition Technique)
Designers should be careful to match the geometry of the FEM and soil response
program. If the location of the foundation springs (or node) in the FEM does not
match the location input to the soil response program, the two programs will
not converge correctly.

July 2019
E. Boundary Conditions (Method II)

To calculate spring coefficients, the designer must first identify the predicted shape,
or direction of loading, of the foundation member where the spring is located in the
bridge model. This will determine if one or a combination of two boundary conditions
apply for the transverse and longitudinal directions of a support.
A fixed head boundary condition occurs when the foundation element is in double
curvature where translation without rotation is the dominant behavior. Stated in
other terms, the shear causes deflection in the opposite direction of applied moment.
This is a common assumption applied to both directions of a rectangular pile group in
a pile supported footing.
A free head boundary condition is when the foundation element is in single curvature
where translation and rotation is the dominant behavior. Stated in other terms, the
shear causes deflection in the same direction as the applied moment. Most large
diameter shaft designs will have a single curvature below ground line and require a
free head assumption. The classic example of single curvature is a single column on a
single shaft. In the transverse direction, this will act like a flagpole in the wind, or free
head. What is not so obvious is the same shaft will also have single curvature in the
longitudinal direction (below the ground line), even though the column exhibits some
double curvature behavior. Likewise, in the transverse direction of multi-column
piers, the columns will have double curvature (frame action). The shafts will generally
have single curvature below grade and the free head boundary condition applies. The
boundary condition for large shafts with springs placed at the ground line will be free
head in most cases.
The key to determine the correct boundary condition is to resolve the correct sign
of the moment and shear at the top of the shaft (or point of interest for the spring
location). Since multi-mode results are always positive (CQC), this can be worked out
by observing the seismic moment and shear diagrams for the structure. If the sign
convention is still unclear, apply a unit load in a separate static FEM run to establish
sign convention at the point of interest.
The correct boundary condition is critical to the seismic response analysis. For any
type of soil and a given foundation loading, a fixed boundary condition will generally
provide soil springs four to five times stiffer than a free head boundary condition.
F. Spring Calculation (Method II)
The first step to calculate a foundation spring is to determine the shear and moment
in the structural member where the spring is to be applied in the FEM. Foundation
spring coefficients should be based on the maximum shear and moment from the
applied longitudinal or transverse seismic loading. The combined load case (1.0L and
0.3T) shall be assumed for the design of structural members, and NOT applied to
determine foundation response. For the simple case of a bridge with no skew, the
longitudinal shear and moment are the result of the seismic longitudinal load, and the
transverse components are ignored. This is somewhat unclear for highly skewed piers
or curved structures with rotated springs, but the principle remains the same.
G. Matrix Coordinate Systems (Method II)
The Global coordinate systems used to demonstrate matrix theory are usually
similar to the system defined for substructure loads in Section 7.1.3, and is shown in

July 2019
Figure 7.2.5-2. This is also the default Global coordinate system of GT STRUDL. This
coordinate system applies to this Section to establish the sign convention for matrix
terms. Note vertical axial load is labeled as P, and horizontal shear load is labeled
as V.
Also note the default Global coordinate system in CSI BRIDGE uses Z as the vertical
axis (gravity axis). When imputing spring values in CSI BRIDGE the coefficients in
the stiffness matrix will need to be adjusted accordingly. CSI BRIDGE allows you to
assign spring stiffness values to support joints. By default, only the diagonal terms of
the stiffness matrix can be assigned, but when selecting the advanced option, terms
to a symmetrical {6x6} matrix can be assigned.
Figure 7.2.5-2 Global Coordinate System

Py
My
Longit udinal Mx
Vx
Mz
Vz
H. Matrix Coefficient Definitions (Method II)

The stiffness matrix containing the spring values and using the standard coordinate
system is shown in Figure 7.2.5-3. (Note that cross-couple terms generated using
Technique I are omitted). For a description of the matrix generated using Technique
I see Appendix 7-B1. The coefficients in the stiffness matrix are generally referred
to using several different terms. Coefficients, spring or spring value are equivalent
terms. Lateral springs are springs that resist lateral forces. Vertical springs resist
vertical forces.
Figure 7.2.5-3 Standard Global Matrix

⎧ Vx Py Vz Mx My Mz ⎫ ⎧Disp.⎫ ⎧Force⎫
⎪ Vx K11 0 0 0 0 0 ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ Δx ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ Vx ⎪⎪
⎪
⎪ Py 0 K 22 0 0 0 0 ⎪ ⎪ Δy ⎪ ⎪ Py ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎨ Vz 0 0 K33 0 0 0 ⎬ × ⎨ Δz ⎬ = ⎨ Vz ⎬
⎪Mx 0 0 0 K 44 0 0 ⎪ ⎪ θx ⎪ ⎪ Mx ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎪My 0 0 0 0 K55 0 ⎪ ⎪ θy ⎪ ⎪ My ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎩ Mz 0 0 0 0 0 K 66⎭ ⎩ θz ⎭ ⎩ Mz ⎭

July 2019
Where the linear spring constants or K values are defined as follows, using the Global
Coordinates:
K11 = Longitudinal Lateral Stiffness (kip/in)
K22 = Vertical or Axial Stiffness (kip/in)
K33 = Transverse Lateral Stiffness (kip/in)
K44 = Transverse Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K55 = Torsional Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K66 = Longitudinal Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
The linear lateral spring constants along the diagonal represent a point on a non-
linear soil/structure response curve. The springs are only accurate for the applied
loading and less accurate for other loadings. This is considered acceptable for
Strength and Extreme Event design. For calculation of spring constants for Technique
I see Appendix 7-B1.
I. Group Effects
When a foundation analysis uses LPILE or an analysis using PY relationships, group
effects will require the geotechnical properties to be reduced before the spring
values are calculated. The geotechnical report will provide transverse and longitudinal
multipliers that are applied to the PY curves. This will reduce the pile resistance in
a linear fashion. The reduction factors for lateral resistance due to the interaction
of deep foundation members is provided in the Geotechnical Design Manual
Section 8.12.2.3.
J. Shaft Caps and Pile Footings
Where pile supported footings or shaft caps are entirely below grade, their passive
resistance should be utilized. In areas prone to scour or lateral spreading, their passive
resistance should be neglected.
7.2.6 Lateral Analysis of Piles and Shafts

A. Determination of Tip Elevations
Lateral analysis of piles and shafts involves determination of a shaft or pile tip
location sufficient to resist lateral loads in both orthogonal directions. In many cases,
the shaft or pile tip depth required to resist lateral loads may be deeper than that
required for bearing or uplift. However, a good starting point for a tip elevation is
the depth required for bearing or uplift. Another good “rule-of-thumb” starting point
for shaft tips is an embedment depth of 6 diameters (6D) to 8 diameters (8D). Refer
also to the geotechnical report minimum tip elevations provided by the Geotechnical
Engineer.
A parametric study or analysis should be performed to evaluate the sensitivity
of the depth of the shaft or pile to the displacement of the structure (i.e. the
displacement of the shaft or pile head) in order to determine the depth required for
stable, proportionate lateral response of the structure. Determination of shaft or
pile tip location requires engineering judgment, and consideration should be given
to the type of soil, the confidence in the soil data (proximity of soil borings) and the
potential variability in the soil profile. Arbitrarily deepening shaft or pile tips may be
conservative but can also have significant impact on constructability and cost.

July 2019
The following is a suggested approach for determining appropriate shaft or pile tip
elevations that are located in soils. Other considerations will need to be considered
when shaft or pile tips are located in rock, such as the strength of the rock. This
approach is based on the displacement demand seismic design procedures specified
in the AASHTO Seismic Specifications.
1. Size columns and determine column reinforcement requirements for Strength
and Service load cases.
2. Determine the column plastic over-strength moment and shear at the base of
the column using the axial dead load and expected column material properties.
A program such as XTRACT or CSI BRIDGE may be used to help compute these
capacities. The plastic moments and shears are good initial loads to apply to a soil
response program. In some cases, Strength or other Extreme event loads may be
a more appropriate load to apply in the lateral analysis. For example, in eastern
Washington seismic demands are relatively low and elastic seismic or Strength
demands may control.
3. Perform lateral analysis using the appropriate soil data from the Geotechnical
report for the given shaft or pile location. If final soil data is not yet available,
consult with the Geotechnical Engineer for preliminary values to use for the site.
Note: Early in the lateral analysis it is wise to obtain moment and shear demands
in the shaft or pile and check that reasonable reinforcing ratios can be used to
resist the demands. If not, consider resizing the foundation elements and restart
the lateral analysis.
4. Develop a plot of embedment depth of shaft or pile versus lateral deflection
of the top of shaft or pile. The minimum depth, or starting point, shall be the
depth required for bearing or uplift or as specified by the geotechnical report.
An example plot of an 8′ diameter shaft is shown in Figure 7.2.6-1 and illustrates
the sensitivity of the lateral deflections versus embedment depth. Notice that at
tip depths of approximately 50′ (roughly 6D) the shaft head deflections begin to
increase substantially with small reductions in embedment depth. The plot also
clearly illustrates that tip embedment below 70′ has no impact on the shaft head
lateral deflection.
5. From the plot of embedment depth versus lateral deflection, choose the
appropriate tip elevation. In the example plot in Figure 7.2.6-1, the engineer
should consider a tip elevation to the left of the dashed vertical line drawn in
the Figure. The final tip elevation would depend on the confidence in the soil
data and the tolerance of the structural design displacement. For example, if the
site is prone to variability in soil layers, the engineer should consider deepening
the tip; say 1 to 3 diameters, to ensure that embedment into the desired soil
layer is achieved. The tip elevation would also depend on the acceptable lateral
displacement of the structure. To assess the potential variability in the soil layers,
the Geotechnical Engineer assigned to the project should be consulted.

July 2019
Figure 7.2.6-1
ShaftShaft
TipTip
Elevation vs Shaft Head Deflection
Elevation vs Shaft Head Deflection
Shaft Head Deflection (in)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
0
10 Ground Elev.
20
30
Shaft Tip Embedment (ft)
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
6. With the selected tip elevation, review the deflected shape of the shaft or pile,
which can be plotted in LPILE. Examples are shown in Figure 7.2.6-2. Depending
on the size and stiffness of the shaft or pile and the soil properties, a variety of
deflected shapes are possible, ranging from a rigid body (fence post) type shape
to a long slender deflected shape with 2 or more inflection points. Review the
tip deflections to ensure they are reasonable, particularly with rigid body type
deflected shapes. Any of the shapes in the Figure may be acceptable, but again it
will depend on the lateral deflection the structure can tolerate.

July 2019
Figure 7.2.6-2 Various Shaft Deflected Shapes
Depth (ft)
Depth (ft)
Depth (ft)
Figure 7.2.6-2 – Various Shaft Deflected Shapes

July 2019
The engineer will also need to consider whether liquefiable soils are present and/
or if the shaft or pile is within a zone where significant scour can occur. In this case
the analysis needs to be bracketed to envelope various scenarios. It is likely that a
liquefiable or scour condition case may control deflection. In general, the WSDOT
policy is to not include scour with Extreme Event I load combinations. In other words,
full seismic demands or the plastic over-strength moment and shear, are generally
not applied to the shaft or pile in a scoured condition. However, in some cases a
portion of the anticipated scour will need to be included with the Extreme Event I
load combination limit states. When scour is considered with the Extreme Event I
limit state, the soil resistance up to a maximum of 25 percent of the scour depth for
the design flood event (100 year) shall be deducted from the lateral analysis of the
pile or shaft. In all cases where scour conditions are anticipated at the bridge site or
specific pier locations, the Geotechnical Engineer and the Hydraulics Branch shall
be consulted to help determine if scour conditions should be included with Extreme
Event I limit states.
If liquefaction can occur, the bridge shall be analyzed using both the static and
liquefied soil conditions. The analysis using the liquefied soils would typically yield
the maximum bridge deflections and will likely control the required tip elevation,
whereas the static soil conditions may control for strength design of the shaft or pile.
Lateral spreading is a special case of liquefied soils, in which lateral movement of
the soil occurs adjacent to a shaft or pile located on or near a slope. Refer to the
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 for discussion on lateral spreading. Lateral loads
will need to be applied to the shaft or pile to account for lateral movement of the
soil. There is much debate as to the timing of the lateral movement of the soil and
whether horizontal loads from lateral spread should be combined with maximum
seismic inertia loads from the structure. Most coupled analyses are 2D, and do
not take credit for lateral flow around shafts, which can be quite conservative. The
AASHTO Seismic Specifications permits these loads to be uncoupled; however, the
Geotechnical Engineer shall be consulted for recommendations on the magnitude and
combination of loads. See Geotechnical Design Manual Sections 6.4.2.7 and 6.5.4 for
additional guidance on combining loads when lateral spreading can occur.
B. Pile and Shaft Design for Lateral Loads
The previous section provides guidelines for establishing tip elevations for shafts
and piles. Sensitivity analyses that incorporate both foundation and superstructure
kinematics are often required to identify the soil conditions and loadings that will
control the tip, especially if liquefied or scoured soil conditions are present. Several
conditions will also need to be analyzed when designing the reinforcement for shafts
and piles to ensure the controlling case is identified. All applicable strength, service
and extreme load cases shall be applied to each condition. A list of these conditions
includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Static soil properties with both stiff and soft shaft or pile properties. Refer to
Sections 7.2.3(B) and 7.2.3(C) for guidelines on computing stiff and soft shaft or
pile properties.
2. Dynamic or degraded soil properties with both stiff and soft shaft or pile
properties.

July 2019
3. Liquefied soil properties with both stiff and soft shaft or pile properties.
a. When lateral spreading is possible, an additional loading condition will need
to be analyzed. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be consulted for guidance
on the magnitude of seismic load to be applied in conjunction with lateral
spreading loads. See Geotechnical Design Manual Sections 6.4.2.7 and 6.5.4
for additional guidance on combining loads when lateral spreading can occur.
4. Scour condition with stiff and soft shaft or pile properties. The scour condition
is typically not combined with Extreme Event I load combinations, however the
designer shall consult with the Hydraulics Branch and Geotechnical Engineer for
recommendations on load combinations. If scour is considered with the Extreme
Event I limit state, the analysis should be conducted assuming that the soil in
the upper 25 percent of the estimated scour depth for the design (100 year)
scour event has been removed to determine the available soil resistance for the
analysis of the pile or shaft.
Note: Often, the highest acceleration the bridge sees is in the first cycles of the
earthquake, and degradation and/or liquefaction of the soil tends to occur toward the
middle or end of the earthquake. Therefore, early in the earthquake, loads are high,
soil-structure stiffness is high, and deflections are low. Later in the earthquake, the
soil-structure stiffness is lower and deflections higher. This phenomenon is normally
addressed by bracketing the analyses as discussed above.
However, in some cases a site specific procedure may be required to develop a site
specific design response spectrum. A site specific procedure may result in a reduced
design response spectrum when compared to the general method specified in the
AASHTO Seismic 3.4. Section 3.4 requires the use of spectral response parameters
determined using USGS/AASHTO Seismic Hazard Maps. The AASHTO Seismic
Specifications limits the reduced site specific response spectrum to two-thirds of
what is produced using the general method. Refer to the Geotechnical Design Manual
Chapter 6 for further discussion and consult the Geotechnical Engineer for guidance.
Refer to Section 7.8 Shafts and Chapter 4 for additional guidance/requirements on design
and detailing of shafts and Section 7.9 Piles and Piling and Chapter 4 for additional
guidance/requirements on design and detailing of piles.
7.2.7 Spread Footing Modeling

For a first trial footing configuration, Strength column moments or column plastic hinging
moments may be applied to generate footing dimensions. Soil spring constants are
developed using the footing plan area, thickness, embedment depth, Poisson’s ratio ν, and
shear modulus G. The Geotechnical Branch will provide the appropriate Poisson’s ratio
and shear modulus. Spring constants for shallow rectangular footings are obtained using
the following equations developed for rectangular footings. This method for calculating
footing springs is referenced in ASCE 41-06, Section 4.4.2.1.2. (Note: ASCE 41-06 was
developed from FEMA 356.)

July 2019
Figure 7.2.7-1 Spread Footing Orientation for Developing Spring Constants


7.2.7 Spread

Footing

7.2.7
7.2.7 Spread
Spread Footing Modeling
Modeling
7.2.7 Spread Footing
Footing Modeling
Modeling
For
For aa first trial footing configuration, Strength column moments
moments or column
column plastic hinging
For
For aa first
moments first trial
trial
firstmay
footing
footing
trial be
footing
configuration,
configuration,
configuration,
applied to generate
Strength
Strength column
column
column moments
Strengthdimensions.
footing moments
Soil
or
or
or column
springcolumn
plastic
plastic
plastic
constants are
hinging
hinging
hinging
developed
moments
moments may
may be
be applied
applied to
to generate
generate footing
footing dimensions.
dimensions. Soil
Soil spring
spring constants
constants are
are developed
moments
using may be plan
the footing applied to thickness,
area, generate footing dimensions.
embedment Soil springratio
depth, Poisson’s constants are developed
ν and shear developed
modulus G.
using the footing plan area, thickness, embedment depth, Poisson’s ratio ν and shear modulus G.
usingGeotechnical
The the footing plan area,
Branch
Orient thickness,
will provide embedment
the depth,
appropriate Poisson’s
Poisson’s ratio
ratio andν and shear
shear modulus
modulus. G.
Spring
The Geotechnical Branch willaxes such
provide thethat L > B. Poisson’s ratio and shear modulus.
appropriate Spring
The Geotechnical
constants for Branch
shallow will provide
rectangular the are
footings appropriate
obtainedPoisson’s
using theratio and shear
following modulus.
equations Spring
developed
If L =for
constants
constants
constants
for use x-axis
B shallow
shallow
for shallow
equations
rectangular
rectangular
rectangular
forare
footings
footings
footings
both
are x-axisusing
obtained
are obtained
obtained
andthe
using y-axis.
the following
the following
usingsprings
following
equations
equations
equations
developed
developed
developed
for rectangular footings. This method for calculating footing is referenced in ASCE 41-
for rectangular footings. This method for calculating footing springs is referenced in ASCE 41-
for rectangular
06, Section 4.4.2.1.2, footings.
pageThis
89 method for calculating
(Note: ASCE 41-06 wasfooting springs
developed is referenced
from FEMA 356) in ASCE 41-
Where: 06, Section 4.4.2.1.2, page 89 (Note: ASCE 41-06 was developed from FEMA 356)
06, Section 4.4.2.1.2, page 89 (Note: ASCE 41-06 was developed from FEMA 356)
K = β Ksur
K = Translation or rotational spring
Ksur = Stiffness ofOrient axes
axes such
foundation
Orient
Orient suchatthat L
L>> B.
surface,
that B. If
see
If L
L= B
B use
=Table
use x-axis
x-axis equations
7.2.7-1 equations for
for both
both x-axis
x-axis and
and y-axis.
y-axis.
Orient axes
axes such
such that
that L
L>> B.
B. If
If L
L==B use
use x-axis
BFigure 7.2.7-1equations
x-axis equations for
for both
both x-axis
x-axis and
and y-axis.
y-axis.
β = Correction factor for embedment, see Table 7.2.7-2
Figure
Figure 7.2.7-1
7.2.7-1
Figure 7.2.7-1
Table 7.2.7-1 Stiffness Degree

of Foundation
of Freedomat Surface Ksur Format
Degree
Degree of Freedom Ksur Format
Degree of
of Freedom Ksur Format
Format
Degree of Freedom Freedom KsurK Format
GB   Lsur0000....65 
65  1.2 
65
65
Translation along GB
GB 
3 .4 L  L 0.65 
Translation
Translation along x-axis
x-axis GB 3 . 4  L  
  1 . 2 
Translation along
Translation along x-axis along x-axis
x-axis 2
2  v
 vvv   B

3 . 4  B
B    1 . 2 
22   B  

GB   L  000...65 0.65
65 L 
Translation along GB
GB 3 ..4  L L  0.65 
65
0 ..4 L
L  0 ..8 
Translation along y-axis
y-axis GB 3
vv 33..44 B 4 L  0 4 L  0 8
Translation
Translation along
along y-axis
y-axis 2
22 

 v   B
B
   00..44 B B
B  00..88

2  v   B  B 

GB   L
0.75
00..75
0
0 .
. 75
75 

GB 1  L
Translation along z-axis ..55 L   0 ..8 
75
Translation
Translation along
Translation along z-axis along z-axis
z-axis 1GB v 1 1 . 55
55 
 B 

 0
0 . 8
8 
Translation along z-axis 1  v 1.55 B   0.8
1  v  B 
3
GB
GB 3   L  
GB 33 00..44 L  0.1
3
Rocking
Rocking
Rocking about x-axis
Rocking
about
about x-axis
x-axis 1GB v 00..44 B L  
L
 00..11

Rocking about
about x-axis
x-axis 1  v   B   0.1
1 v   B  
3  2.4

GB   L 
034
3 2
2...4
2 4
Rocking about GB
GB 3 
3
3
00..47 47 L L  2.4 
4
 00..034
Rocking about y-axis
Rocking about y-axis
y-axis GB  vv 00..47 L   0.034
Rocking
Rocking about
about y-axis
y-axis 111  47 B B   0.034
1  vv  B B 
 2.45

3 0.53 L  222...45 
2 . 45
GB L
L
45
Torsion about
Torsion about z-axis about z-axis
z-axis 3 L   00..51 
3 45
Torsion GB 3 00..53  B  51
  0.51
3
Torsion
Torsion about
about z-axis
z-axis GB
GB 0.53 B  53  0 . 51
  B B  


Stiffness
Stiffness of
of Foundation
Foundation atat SurfaceCoefficients
SurfaceCoefficients
Stiffness
Stiffness of
of Foundation
Foundation at SurfaceCoefficients
at7.2.7-1
FigureTable SurfaceCoefficients
FigureTable 7.2.7-1
FigureTable 7.2.7-1
FigureTable 7.2.7-1

July 2019
Figure 7.2.7-2 Spread Footing Variables for Table 7.2.7-2


dd = d = Height of effective sidewall contact (may be less than
Height of effective sidewall contact (may be less than
Where: d= Height
=total
Height of
of effective
effective
foundation sidewall
sidewall
height if the contact
contact (may
(may
foundation is be
be less
less than
exposed).than
total
total foundation
foundation height
height if
if the
the foundation
foundation is
is exposed).
exposed).
total foundation
= Height of effective sidewallhh contact (mayheight
be if
lessthe foundation
than total is exposed).
foundation
d
h=
= Depth
= Depth
to
Depth to
centroid
to centroid
centroid
of
of
of
effective sidewall
effective sidewall contact. height if the
contact.
foundation is exposed). h = Depth to centroid of effective
Figure
Figure
effective
7.2.7-2
7.2.7-2
sidewall
sidewall contact.
contact.
Figure 7.2.7-2
Figure 7.2.7-2
7.2.7-2
Figure
h = Depth to centroid of effective sidewall contact.
Table 7.2.7-2 Correction Factor for Embedment

Degree
Degree of
of Freedom
Freedom β
β
Degree
Degree of
Degree of Freedom of Freedom
Freedom β
β
Translation
Translation along
along x-axis
x-axis  D   BBB  LLL  0000....4444  0 .4
Translation
Translation along
along x-axis D  hd
x-axis 1
1 0
 0...21
21 D  1
D 1 
 1
1 ..6
6  hd
hd
hd B 22 L  
Translation along x-axis 1 100.2121 B
B  1 111..66 BL
 BL
 
BL2  
2
B  
2
 B BL
Translation along y-axis     0000....4444 
0 .4
Translation along
along y-axis
y-axis  D
D  hd
hd  B
B 
 L
L 
Translation 1 D 

D  1
0
 0...21  1
 1...6 hd B
6 hd B 22 L  L   
Translation along y-axis 1 1
1
L
L00.21
21
 1
21 1
1 1 1.6 6 LB LB 22  
 L 

L   
 
 LB LB 2
 

Translation
Translation along
along z-axis
z-axis  2
22
Translation
Translation along
along z-axis
z-axis  1
1 D
D
D
 B
B
B
   d d 

 B
B 
 L
L 

  233233 
1 1 
 1
1 D  22 
 2
2 ..6
6 B 
  11   00..32
32  d d B
B 
 L
L  3 
Translation along z-axis 1 B  22 
 21 B 22..66L   11   00..32
32 BL  
1  21
21 B
L
L  
L  BL BL  
BL
 21 B
 
Rocking about
about x-axis  2 
0.2
Rocking x-axis d d  d 00..22 B
0
 0..2
Rocking
Rocking about
about x-axis
x-axis 1 2 ..5 d
d 2 d
d d
d
2
B
B
Rocking about x-axis 1  2 5 d 1 1  2
2 d 
 d 
 B 
1
1 2 2..5 5B B 11  B B  D D  L
L 
B
B  
 B
B D  D  L 
L 

Rocking about
about y-axis  d 000...666   0000....6666 
0.6 1.9 0.6
Rocking
Rocking y-axis  d 1111....9999  d
Rocking about
about y-axis
y-axis 11  11..44 ddd 0.6 11..55  33..7  dd
d   d d
d  
Rocking about y-axis 
11   7
 11..44 L L  11..55   33..7 7 L L   D D  
 LL   L   D
 L D  
Torsion
Torsion about
about z-axis
z-axis  B  d
0.9
0000....9999
Torsion
Torsion about
Torsion about z-axis about z-axis
z-axis 1  2 ..6 1  B
B  d d 
1
1  2 6 1  B d
1 2 2..6 61 1L L  B B 
 L
L  B B 
Correction
Correction Factor
Factor for
for Embedment
Embedment
Correction
Correction Factor
Factor
Table for
for
7.2.7-2Embedment
Embedment
Table 7.2.7-2
Table
Table 7.2.7-2
Table 7.2.7-2
7.2.7-2

July 2019
7.3 Column Design

7.3.1 General Design Considerations
The preliminary plan stage determines the initial column size, column spacing, and bridge
span length based on a preliminary analysis. Columns are spaced to give maximum
structural benefit except where aesthetic considerations dictate otherwise. Piers
normally are spaced to meet the geometric and aesthetic requirements of the site and to
give maximum economy for the total structure. Good preliminary engineering judgment
results in maximum economy for the total structure.
The designer may make changes after the preliminary plan stage. The Design Unit
Manager will need to review all changes, and if the changes are more than minor
dimension adjustments, the Bridge Project Support Engineer and the State Bridge and
Structures Architect will also need to be involved in the review.
Tall piers spaced farther apart aesthetically justify longer spans. Difficult and expensive
foundation conditions will also justify longer spans. Span lengths may change in the
design stage if substantial structural improvement and/or cost savings can be realized.
The designer should discuss the possibilities of span lengths or skew with the Design Unit
Manager as soon as possible. Changes in pier spacing at this stage can have significant
negative impacts to the geotechnical investigation.
Column spacing should minimize column dead load moments. Multiple columns are
better suited for handling lateral loads due to wind and/or earthquake. The designer may
alter column size or spacing for structural reasons or change from a single-column pier
to a multicolumn pier. Columns should be designed so that construction is as simple and
repetitive as possible. The diameter of circular columns should be a multiple of one foot;
however increments of 6 inches may be appropriate in some cases. Rectangular sections
shall have lengths and widths that are multiples of 3 inches. Long rectangular columns
are often tapered to reduce the amount of column reinforcement required for strength.
Tapers should be linear for ease of construction.
For long columns, it may be advantageous to reduce the amount of reinforcement as the
applied loads decrease along the column. In these cases, load combinations need to be
generated at the locations where the reinforcement is reduced.
Bridge plans shall show column construction joints at the top of footing or pedestal and at
the bottom of crossbeam. Optional construction joints with roughened surfaces should be
provided at approximately 30-foot vertical spacing.

July 2019
7.3.2 Slenderness Effects

This section supplements and clarifies AASHTO LRFD. The goal of a slenderness analysis
is to estimate the additional bending moments in the columns that are developed due
to axial loads acting upon a deflected structure. Two primary analysis methods exist:
the moment magnifier method and the second-order analysis. The designer must decide
which method to use based upon the slenderness ratio (kLu/r) of the column(s). Figure
7.3.2-1 below illustrates the basic steps in the column design process for evaluating the
Chapter 7 effects of slenderness on columns and methods for computing magnification of moments
Substructure Design

on columns. 

Figure 7.3.2-1 Column Design Flowchart for Non-Seismic Design





 



 
 
 
  

  
   

   
     

   
     




  
  
  
Column Design Flowchart for Non-Seismic Design

Figure 7.3.3-1

July 2019
A. Moment Magnification Method

The moment magnification method is described in AASHTO LRFD Section 4.5.3.2.2.
In general, if magnification factors computed using the AASHTO LRFD are found to
exceed about 1.4, then a second-order analysis may yield substantial benefits.
In a member with loads applied at the joints, any significant lateral deflection
indicated the member is unbraced. The usual practice is to consider the pier columns
as unbraced in the transverse direction. The superstructure engages girder stops at
the abutment and resists lateral sidesway due to axial loads. However, pier lateral
deflections are significant and are considered unbraced. Short spanned bridges may
be an exception. Most bridge designs provide longitudinal expansion bearings at
the end piers. Intermediate columns are considered unbraced because they must
resist the longitudinal loading. The only time a column is braced in the longitudinal
direction is when a framed bracing member does not let the column displace more
than L/1500. L is the total column length. In this case, the bracing member must be
designed to take all of the horizontal forces.
B. Second-Order Analysis
A second-order analysis that includes the influence of loads acting on the deflected
structure is required under certain circumstances, and may be advisable in others. It
can lead to substantial economy in the final design of many structures. Computations
of effective length factors, k, and buckling loads, Pc, are not required for a second-
order analysis, though they may be helpful in establishing the need for such an
analysis. The designer should discuss the situation with the Design Unit Manager
before proceeding with the analysis. The ACI Building Code (ACI 318-08), should be
consulted when carrying out a second-order analysis.
1. Design Methods for a Second-Order Analysis
For columns framed together, the entire frame should be analyzed as a unit.
Analyzing individual columns result in overly conservative designs for some
columns and non- conservative results for others. The preferred method
for performing a second-order analysis of an entire frame or isolated single
columns is to use a nonlinear finite element program with appropriate stiffness
and restraint assumptions. The factored group loads are applied to the frame,
including the self-weight of the columns. The model is then analyzed using
the nonlinear option. The final design moments are obtained directly from the
analysis.
PD moments are added to the applied moments using an iterative process until
stability is reached. The deflections should converge within 5 percent of the total
deflection. Analysis must include the effect of the column weight; therefore, the
axial7 .2 .3-1
dead load�� be
must ��
adjusted as� follows:
� �� 1��
7 .3 .6-1 �� 1�3 �� (7.3.2-1)
��
��
7 .4 .6-1 ��
��
��
7 .4 .6-2 ��
� � � �
��
7 .4 .7-1 ��
July 2019
7 .8 .1-1 � � ��
2. Applying Factored Loads

For a second-order analysis, loads are applied to the structure and the analysis
results in member forces and deflections. It must be recognized that a second-
order analysis is non-linear and the commonly assumed principle of superposition
may not be applicable. The loads applied to the structure should be the entire set
of factored loads for the load group under consideration. The analysis must be
repeated for each group load of interest. The problem is complicated by the fact
that it is often difficult to predict in advance which load groups will govern.
For certain loadings, column moments are sensitive to the stiffness assumptions
used in the analysis. For example, loads developed as a result of thermal
deformations within a structure may change significantly with changes in column,
beam, and foundation stiffness. Accordingly, upper and lower bounds on the
stiffness should be determined and the analysis repeated using both sets to
verify the governing load has been identified.
3. Member Properties
As with a conventional linear elastic frame analysis, various assumptions and
simplifications must be made concerning member stiffness, connectivity, and
foundation restraint. Care must be taken to use conservative values for the
slenderness analysis. Reinforcement, cracking, load duration, and their variation
along the members are difficult to model while foundation restraint will
be modeled using soil springs.
7.3.3 Shear Design

Shear design should follow the “Simplified Procedure for Nonprestressed Sections”
in AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.1.
7.3.4 Column Silos

Column silos are an acceptable technique to satisfy the balanced stiffness and frame
geometry requirements of Section 4.2.7 and the AASHTO Seismic Specifications. Due to
the construction and inspection complications of column silos, designers are encouraged
to meet balanced stiffness and frame geometry requirements by the other methods
suggested in Section 4.1.4 of the AASHTO Seismic Specifications prior to use of column
silos.
A. General Design and Detailing Requirements
1. Column silo plans, specifications, and estimates shall be included in the Contract
Documents.
2. Column silos shall be designed to resist lateral earth and hydrostatic pressure,
including live load surcharge if applicable, for a 75-year minimum service life.
3. Column silos are not permitted for in-water locations such as in rivers and lakes.
4. Clearance between the column and the column silo shall be adequate for column
lateral displacement demands, construction and post-earthquake inspection, but
shall not be less than 1′-6″.
5. A 6″ minimum clearance shall be provided from the top of column silo to
ground level.

July 2019
6. Maximum depth of column silos shall not exceed 15 feet.

7. Column silos shall be watertight when located below the highest expected
groundwater elevation. Silo covers need not be liquid tight.
8. Column silos shall be positively attached to the foundation element.
B. Column Silos Formed From Extending Shaft Casing
Designers shall determine a minimum steel casing thickness sufficient to resist lateral
loads and shall provide it in the Contract Documents. This thickness shall include a
sacrificial steel area for corrosion resistance per Section 7.10.2H. The actual steel
casing size and materials shall be determined by the Contractor as delineated in
Standard Specifications Section 6-19 and 9-36. Appropriate detailing, as shown in
Figure 7.3.4-1, shall be provided. The designer shall check that the minimum column-
to-silo horizontal clearance is provided even if the permanent casing is constructed
with a smaller diameter slip casing.
C. Column Silos Formed by Other Methods
Column silos formed by other methods, such as corrugated metal pipes, may be
considered if the general requirements above are satisfied.
D. Column Silo Covers and Access Hatches
A column silo cover, including access hatches, shall be specified in the Contract Plans
as shown in Appendix 7.3-A1-1. Column silo covers and access hatches shall be
painted in accordance with Standard Specifications Section 6-07.3(9).
Column silo covers shall be protected from vehicular loading. Column silo covers shall
be capable of sliding on top of the column silo and shall not restrain column lateral
displacement demands. Obstructions to the column silo cover sliding such as barriers
or inclined slopes are not allowed adjacent to the column silo where they may
interfere with column lateral displacement demands. Column silo covers and tops of
column silos shall be level.
Sufficient access hatches shall be provided in the column silo cover so that all
surfaces of the column and the column silo can be inspected. Access hatches shall
include a minimum clear opening of 1′-0″ × 1′-0″ to accommodate the lowering of
pumping and inspection equipment into the column silo. Access hatches for direct
personnel access shall have a minimum clear opening of 2′-0″ square. Column silo
covers shall be designed to be removable by maintenance and inspection personnel.
Public access into the column silo shall be prevented.

July 2019
Figure 7.3.4-1 Column Silo on Shaft Foundation
















  
 















 







7.3.5 Column Reinforcement

A. Reinforcing Bar Material
Steel reinforcing bars for all bridge substructure elements (precast and cast-in-place)
shall be in accordance with Section 5.1.2.
B. Longitudinal Reinforcement
The reinforcement ratio is the steel area divided by the gross area of the section
(As/Ag). The maximum reinforcement ratio shall be 0.04 in SDCs A, B, C and D. The
minimum reinforcement ratio shall be 0.007 for SDC A, B, and C and shall be 0.01 for
SDC D.
For bridges in SDC A, if oversized columns are used for architectural reasons, the
minimum reinforcement ratio of the gross section may be reduced to 0.005, provided
all loads can be carried on a reduced section with similar shape and the reinforcement
ratio of the reduced section is equal to or greater than 0.01 and 0.133ƒ′c/ƒy. The
column dimensions are to be reduced by the same ratio to obtain the similar shape.
The reinforcement shall be evenly distributed and symmetric within the column.

July 2019
C. Longitudinal Splices
In general, no splices are allowed when the required length of longitudinal
reinforcement is less than the conventional mill length (typically 60-feet). Splicing of
longitudinal reinforcement shall be outside the plastic hinge regions. But in SDC A,
splices need only be located a minimum of 1.5 times the column diameter from the
top and bottom of the column. The bridge plans shall clearly identify the limits of the
permissible splice zone. Figure 7.3.5-1 shows standard column reinforcement details.
For bridges in SDC’s A and B, no lap splices shall be used for #14 or #18 bars. Either
lap or mechanical splices may be used for #11 bars and smaller. Lap splices shall be
detailed as Class B splices. The smaller bars in the splice determine the length of lap
splice required. When space is limited, #11 bars and smaller can use welded splices,
an approved mechanical butt splice, or the upper bars can be bent inward (deformed
by double bending) to lie inside and parallel to the lower bars. The spacing of the
transverse reinforcement over the length of a lap splice shall not exceed 4-inches or
one-quarter of the minimum member dimension.
For bridge in SDC’s C and D, bars shall be spliced using mechanical splices meeting
the requirements of Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(24)F. Splices shall be
staggered. The distance between splices of adjacent bars shall be greater than the
maximum of 20 bar diameters or 24-inches.
Figure 7.3.5-1 Column Splice and Plastic Hinge Region Details

¢ COLUMN
Embed into crossbeam as
¢ COLUMN
close as practical to top
of crossbeam and a minimum
¸ of long. reinforcement
- Optional lap splices shall only
REQUIRED LAP SPLICE

development length.
MIN. AASHTO LRFD

be permitted when column lengths
require longitudinal reinforcement
¸¸
longer than 60'-0"
2'-0"
- Maximum pitch of transverse

reinforcement along lap splice is 4"
Þ PLASTIC HINGE REGION
¸
ß
ß
SPIRAL OR HOOP (TYP.)

Lpr
REQUIRED LAP SPLICE
ALTERNATE SPLICE
MIN. AASHTO LRFD
LOCATIONS AROUND
PERIMETER OF
COLUMN (TYP.)
OPTIONAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT

SPLICE DETAIL THIS SHEET
WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE.

SEE TYPICAL COLUMN
PERMISSIBLE WITHIN
COLUMN LAP SPLICE
THESE LIMITS.
OPTIONAL MECHANICAL
SPLICE. STAGGER 20 BAR
DIAMETERS OR 24" MIN. TYPICAL COLUMN
20 BAR DIAMETERS
LAP SPLICE DETAIL
OR 24" MIN. ABOVE
PLASTIC HINGE REGION
OR CONSTRUCTION JOINTS.
Calculate per Guide Spec 4.11.7
Þ PLASTIC HINGE REGION
Max. of: - 1.5 Gross cross-sectional dimension

in direction of bending = NOTES TO DESIGNER
- Region in column where moment
Lpr
demand exceeds 75% of plastic

COLUMN LONG.
moment
REINFORCEMENT
- Analytical plastic hinge length, Lp
WELD DIMENSIONS (IN)

2'-0"
¸¸ L
BAR SIZE S E
(LENGTH)
#4 ¼ Â 4
Noncontact lap SPIRALS #5 Ç Ä 6
¸¸ Accounts for any strain penetration
splice per BDM into connecting elements #6 É Ä 6
(shaft, footing, crossbeam, etc.)
¸
REINFORCING 1" LENGTH OF 1"
BAR WELD
ELEVATION
3 WRAPS
OF SPIRAL WELDED SPLICE
‡ SEE SPIRAL TERMINATION DETAIL
AT END OF S(E) L
SPIRAL
¸¸ CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
WELDED LAP SPLICE DETAIL
WELDING SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF STD. SPEC.
SPIRAL 6-02.3(24)E. FOR WELD DIMENSIONS, SEE TABLE.
PROVIDE 1½" CLEAR FROM TOP OF SPIRAL TO LOWEST POINT OF
ß Þ NO COLUMN BRACING IS PERMITTED IN THE PLASTIC HINGE
CONSTRUCTION JOINT. PROVIDE 4" TO 6" VERTICAL BREAK IN SPIRAL TO
ALLOW PLACEMENT OF BOTTOM MAT OF CROSSBEAM REINF. SPIRAL REGION.
TERMINATION DETAIL
Þ NO WELDING OF SPIRALS IS PERMITTED IN THE PLASTIC
HINGE REGION AFTER THE COLUMN CAGE IS ASSEMBLED.
SPIRALS SHALL BE FIELD OR SHOP WELDED INDEPENDENTLY
AND THEN ASSEMBLED AROUND THE COLUMN LONGITUDINAL
STEEL AFTER WELDING. (THIS NOTE NOT APPLICABLE IN SDC's
C AND D WHERE ONLY HOOP REINFORCEMENT IS PERMITTED)

July 2019
D. Longitudinal Development
1. Crossbeams
Development of longitudinal reinforcement shall be in accordance with AASHTO
Seismic, Sections 8.8.4 and 8.8.8. Column longitudinal reinforcement shall be
extended into crossbeams as close as practically possible to the opposite face of
the crossbeam (below the bridge deck reinforcement).
For precast prestressed concrete girder bridges in SDC A and B with fixed
diaphragms at intermediate piers, column longitudinal reinforcement may be
terminated at top of lower crossbeam, provided that adequate transfer of column
forces is provided.
For precast prestressed concrete girder bridges in SDC C and D with two-stage
fixed diaphragms at intermediate piers, all column longitudinal reinforcement
should extend to the top of the cast-in-place concrete diaphragm (upper
crossbeam) above the lower crossbeam. Careful attention should be given that
column reinforcement does not interfere with extended strands projecting from
the end of the prestressed concrete girders. In case of interference, column
longitudinal reinforcement obstructing the extended strands may be terminated
at top of the lower crossbeam, and shall be replaced with equivalent full-height
stirrups extending from the lower to upper crossbeam within the effective
width as shown in Figure 7.3.5-2. All stirrups within the effective zone, based
on an approximate strut-and-tie model, may be used for this purpose. The
effective zone shall be taken as column diameter plus depth of lower crossbeam
provided that straight column bars are adequately developed into the lower
crossbeam. The effective zone may be increased to the column diameter
plus two times depth of lower crossbeam if headed bars are used for column
longitudinal reinforcement.
If the depth of lower crossbeam is less than 1.25 times the tension development
length required for column reinforcement, headed bars shall be used. Heads on
column bars terminated in the lower crossbeam are preferable from a structural
perspective. However, extra care in detailing during design and extra care in
placement of the column reinforcement during construction is required. Typically
the heads on the column bars will be placed below the lower crossbeam top mat
of reinforcement. Headed reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM 970 Class HA.
Transverse column reinforcement only needs to extend to the top of the lower
crossbeam just below the top longitudinal steel. However, when the joint shear
principal tension is less than 0.11√f’c, minimum cross tie reinforcement shall
be placed acting across the upper cross beam in accordance with the AASHTO
Seismic, Sections 8.13.3. The minimum cross tie reinforcement shall provide
at least as much confining pressure at yield as the column spiral can provide at
yield. This pressure may be calculated assuming hydrostatic conditions. If the
joint shear principal tension exceeds 0.11√f’c, then additional joint reinforcement
as outlined by AASHTO Seismic, Sections 8.13.3 shall be provided. With the
exception of J-bars, the additional reinforcement shall be placed in the upper and
lower crossbeam. The cross tie reinforcement may be placed with a lap splice in
the center of the joint.

July 2019
Large columns or columns with high longitudinal reinforcement ratios may

result in closely spaced stirrups with little clear space left for proper concrete
consolidation outside the reinforcement. In such cases, either hanger
reinforcement comprised of larger bars with headed anchors may be used in
the effective zone shown in Figure 7.3.5-2 or supplemental stirrups may be
placed beyond the effective zone. Hanger reinforcement in the effective zone
is preferred.
The designer is encouraged to include interference detail/plan views of the
crossbeam reinforcement in relation to the column steel in the contract
drawings. Suggested plans include the views at the lower stage crossbeam top
reinforcement and the upper crossbeam top reinforcement.
2. Footings
Longitudinal reinforcement at the bottom of a column should extend into the
footing and rest on the bottom mat of footing reinforcement with standard
90° hooks. In addition, development of longitudinal reinforcement shall be in
accordance with AASHTO Seismic, Section 8.8.4 and AASHTO LRFD Section
5.10.8.2.1. Headed bars may be used for longitudinal reinforcement at the
bottom of columns. The head shall be placed at least 3-inches below the footing
bottom mat reinforcement. This may require the footing to be locally thickened in
the region of the column to provide cover for the bottom of the headed bars. The
head of the rebar placed below the footing bottom reinforcement mat shall not
contribute to the compressive capacity of the rebar.

July 2019
Figure 7.3.5-2 Longitudinal Development Into Crossbeams
¢ COLUMN
EFFECTIVE ZONE FOR

½(DC -c+DS1 ) ½(DC -c+2DS1 )
COLUMN REINFORCEMENT
WITHOUT HEADED BARS EFFECTIVE ZONE FOR
WITH HEADED BARS
ASTIRRUPS >½ACOLUMN
ASTIRRUPS >½ACOLUMN P.C. GIRDER (EXTENDED STRANDS
NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
PLAN
¢ COLUMN
EFFECTIVE ZONE FOR
½(DC -c+DS1 ) ½(DC -c+2DS1 )
WITHOUT HEADED BARS EFFECTIVE ZONE FOR
WITH HEADED BARS
DS2
HEADED BARS
DS1
45°
45°
DC C = COLUMN CONCRETE COVER
ELEVATION

July 2019
3. Shafts
Column longitudinal reinforcement in shafts is typically straight. Embedment
shall be a minimum length equal to lns = ls + s (per TRAC Report WA- RD 417.1
titled “Noncontact Lap Splices in Bridge Column-Shaft Connections”).
Where:
ls = the larger of 1.7 × lac or 1.7 × ld
lac = development length from the AASHTO Seismic 8.8.4 for the column
ld = tension development length from AASHTO LRFD Section 5.11.2.1 for the
column longitudinal reinforcement.
s = distance between the shaft and column longitudinal reinforcement
The requirements of the AASHTO Seismic, Section 8.8.10 for development

length of column bars extended into oversized pile shafts for SDC C and D shall
not be used.
The factor of 1.7 used in determining ls represents a Class C lap splice
modification factor from previous versions of AASHTO LRFD. Although the
concept of a Class C splice is no longer applicable, the factor is still necessary to
match the recommendations of TRAC Report WA-RD 417.1.
The modification factor in Section 5.10.8.2.1 that allows ld to be decreased by
the ratio of (As required)/(As provided), shall not be used. Using this modification
factor would imply that the reinforcement does not need to yield to carry the
ultimate design load. This may be true in other areas. However, our shaft/
column connections are designed to form a plastic hinge, and therefore the
reinforcement shall have adequate development length to allow the bars to yield.
See Figure 7.3.5-3 for an example of longitudinal development into shafts.
Figure 7.3.5-3 Longitudinal Development Into Shafts

COLUMN
SHAFT
l ns
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
July 2019
E. Transverse Reinforcement
All transverse reinforcement in columns shall be deformed. Although allowed
in the AASHTO LRFD, plain bars or plain wire may not be used for transverse
reinforcement.
Columns in SDC A may use spirals, circular hoops, or rectangular hoops and crossties.
Spirals are the preferred confinement reinforcement and shall be used whenever a
#6 spiral is sufficient to satisfy demands. When demands require reinforcement bars
greater than #6, circular hoops of #7 through #9 may be used. Bundled spirals shall
not be used for columns or shafts. Also, mixing of spirals and hoops within the same
column is not permitted by the AASHTO Seismic
Specifications. Figure 7.3.5-4 and 7.3.5-5 show transverse reinforcement details for
rectangular columns in high and low seismic zones, respectively.
Columns in SDCs C and D shall use hoop reinforcement. Hoop reinforcement shall
be circular where possible, although rectangular hoops with ties may be used when
large, odd shaped column sections are required. Where the column diameter is 3-feet
or less, the WSDOT Steel Specialist shall be contacted regarding the constructability
of smaller diameter welded hoops.
When rectangular hoops with ties are used, consideration shall be given to column
constructability. Such considerations can include, but are not limited to a minimum of
2′-6″ by 3′-0″ open rectangle to allow access for the tremie tube and construction
workers for concrete placement, in-form access hatches, and/or external vibrating.
A larger gap between transverse reinforcement should be provided at the top of
columns to allow space for the crossbeam longitudinal reinforcement to pass. In
SDC’s C & D, the gap shall not exceed the maximum spacing for lateral reinforcement
in plastic hinge regions specified in AASHTO Seismic, Section 8.8.9. This can be of
particular concern in bridge decks with large superelevation cross slopes.

July 2019
Figure 7.3.5-4 Constant and Tapered Rectangular Column Section SDCs C and D


 
 
 



 

 

 

 










July 2019
Figure 7.3.5-5 Constant and Tapered Rectangular Column Section SDCs A and B
 
 







 
 










July 2019
F. Spiral Splices and Hoops

Welded laps shall be used for splicing and terminating spirals and shall conform to
the details shown in Figure 7.3.5-6. Only single sided welds shall be used, which is
the preferred method in construction. Spirals or butt- welded hoops are required for
plastic hinge zones of columns. Lap spliced hoops are not permitted in columns in any
region.
Although hooked lap splices are structurally acceptable, and permissible by
AASHTO LRFD for spirals or circular hoops, they shall not be allowed due to
construction challenges. While placing concrete, tremies get caught in the protruding
hooks, making accessibility to all areas and its withdrawal cumbersome. It is also
extremely difficult to bend the hooks through the column cage into the core of the
column.
When welded hoops are used, the plans shall show a staggered pattern around the
perimeter of the column so that no two adjacent welded splices are located at the
same location. Also, where interlocking hoops are used in rectangular or non- circular
columns, the splices shall be located in the column interior.
Circular hoops for columns shall be shop fabricated using a manual direct butt weld
or resistance butt weld. Currently, a Bridge Special Provision has been developed
to cover the fabrication requirements of hoops for columns and shafts, which may
eventually be included in the Standard Specifications. Manual direct butt welded
hoops require radiographic nondestructive examination (RT), which may result in this
option being cost prohibitive at large quantities.
Columns with circular hoop reinforcement shall have a minimum 2” concrete cover to
the hoops to accommodate resistance butt weld “weld flash” that can extend up to
½” from the bar surface.
Field welded lap splices and termination welds of spirals of any size bar are not
permitted in the plastic hinge region including a zone extending 2’-0” into the
connected member and should be clearly designated on the contract plans. If
spirals are welded while in place around longitudinal steel reinforcement, there is a
chance that an arc can occur between the spiral and longitudinal bar. The arc can
create a notch that can act as a stress riser and may cause premature failure of the
longitudinal bar when stressed beyond yield. Because high strains in the longitudinal
reinforcement can penetrate into the connected member, welding is restricted in
the first 2’-0” of the connected member as well. It would acceptable to field weld
lap splices of spirals off to the side of the column and then slide into place over the

July 2019
Figure 7.3.5-6 Welded Spiral Splice and Butt Splice Details

  
 
 



 

 
 


   
   
     
   

    
    
    


 
 


 
 
 




July 2019
7.3.6 Column Hinges

Column hinges of the6.2.57.3.6
type shown in Figure
Column Hinges 7.3.6-1 were built on past WSDOT bridges.
Typically they were used aboveColumn
a crossbeam
hinges oforthewall pier. These
type shown in Figuretypes
7.3.6-1ofwere
hinges arepast WSDOT bridges.
built on
Typically they were used above a crossbeam or
suitable when widening an existing bridge crossbeam or wall pier with this type of wall pier. These types of hinges are
detail.
suitable when widening an existing bridge crossbeam or wall pier with this type of
The area of the hinge bars in square inches
detail. The area is as follows:
of the hinge bars in square inches is as follows:
��
� � � � ��
�� (7.3.6-1)
��
(7 .3 .6-1)
Where:

Pu is the factored axial load Where:
Vu is the factored shear load Pu is the factored axial load
Vu is the factored shear load
Fy is the reinforcing yield strength (60 ksi)
Fy is the reinforcing yield strength (60 ksi)
θ is the angle of the hinge bar to the is the angle of the hinge bar to the vertical
vertical
The development length required for the hinge bars is 1.25 l . All applicable
d
The development length required for the hinge
modification factorsbars is 1.25 ld.length
for development All applicable
in AASHTO modification
LRFD Section 5.11.2 may
factors for development length in be AASHTO LRFD
used when calculating Section 5.10.8.2
ld. Tie and spiral spacing mayshall
be used when
conform to AASHTO LRFD
confinement
calculating ld. Tie and spiral spacing and shear requirements.
shall conform to AASHTO LRFD Ties and spirals shall not beand
confinement spaced more than
12″ (6″ if longitudinal bars are bundled). Premolded joint filler should be used to
shear requirements. Ties and spirals shall not be spaced more than 12″ (6″ if longitudinal
assure the required rotational capacity. There should also be a shear key at the hinge
bars are bundled). Premolded joint
7 .2 .3-1 �� filler
�� should
bar location. �� be� used
� �� to 1��
assure�� the� required rotational
capacity. There should also be a Whenshearthekey at reinforcement
hinge the hinge bar location.
is bent, additional confinement reinforcing may be
�� 1�to3take
7 .3 .6-1 �� necessary ��
the horizontal ��
component from the bent hinge bars. The maximum
When the hinge reinforcement isspacingbent,ofadditional confinement reinforcing may be
confinement reinforcing for the hinge is the smaller of that required above
necessary to take the horizontaland component
the
��
from
following: �� the bent hinge bars. The maximum
��
��
spacing of confinement reinforcing
7 .4 .6-1 �� for the hinge is the smaller of�� that
�
�
required above and
the following: ��
(7 .3 .6-2)
� � �
��
��
7 .4 .6-2 ��Where:
� �� (7.3.6-2)
Av,�Vs, and d�are �as defined in AASHTO Article “Notations”
��
1h is the distance from the hinge to where the bend begins
Where: Continue this spacing one-quarter of the column width (in the plane
7 .4 .7-1 � � �� perpendicular
�� to the hinge) past thethe
bend in the hinge bars.
Av, Vs, and d are as ��
defined in AASHTO Article “Notations” 1h is distance from
the hinge to where the bend begins
7 .8 .1-1 � � ��
Continue this spacing one-quarter of the column width (in the plane perpendicular to the
hinge) past the bend in the hinge
7 .8 .2-1 � �bars.
��
��
7 .9 .2-1 ��
��
7-B-1 .1 ��
�
��
7-B-1 .2 �� 1�� 3
��
�

��
7-B-1 .3 ��
December 2015
� � �� 1��
��
�
� � ��
7-B-1 .4 ��
� � �
��
7-B-1 .5A �11 � ��
∆�
��
7-B-1 .5B �33 � ��
�∆�
��
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19
7-B-1 .6A �� Page 7-41
��
July 2019
��
7-B-1 .6B ��
Figure 7.3.6-1 Hinge Details















 
 

July 2019
7.3.7 Reduced Column Section

Reduced column sections decrease overstrength plastic demands into the foundation.
Traditional column designs are preferred over this detail, but this may be used if it is
determined that traditional details will not satisfy the design code requirements due to
architectural, balanced stiffness, or other project specific requirements. The reduction at
the base of the column shall be designed as described below and detailed as shown in
Figure 7.3.7-1. The concept is shown in Figure 7.3.7-1 for a spread footing foundation,
but could be used for shaft and pile supported foundations also. Similar checks are
required if the reduced section is placed at the crossbeam, along with any additional
checks required for those sections.
7 .2 .3-1 One
��such
� ��additional check
� �� is �
� � �� joint
1��shear �in the
��
crossbeam based on the overstrength plastic capacity of the reduced column section.
The design and detail at the7 .3 .6-1
top of columns,
�� for� 1architectural
�3 ��flares,
�� is similar.
��
A. Inner Concrete Column ��
��
7 .4 .6-1 ��
1. Longitudinal Reinforcement
�
��
a. The longitudinal inner column reinforcement

��
shall extend a distance of Lns
7 .4 .6-2 �
into the column and shall ��
be set on� top
�� of �bottom mat reinforcement of
� � � ��
foundation with standard 90° hooks. ��
7 .4 .7-1 �� (7.3.7-1)

Where:
7 .8 .1-1 � � ��
Ls = The larger of 1.7×Lac or 1.7×Ld (for Class C lap splice)
Lac = Development length�� of ��
bar from
�� the AASHTO Seismic Section 8.8.4
Ld 7 .8 .2-1
= Tension �� length from AASHTO LRFD Section 5.11.2.1
development ��
(Note: All applicable modification factors for Ld may be used except
for7 .9 .2-1
the reduction
�� specified
�� in� Section 5.11.2.2.2
�� for As required/As
� ��
provided)
sc = Distance from��
longitudinal reinforcement of outer column to inner
7-B-1 .1 �
�
column.
Lp = Analytical Plastic Hinge ��Length defined in the AASHTO Seismic ��
7-B-1 .2 �� 1�� 3
Section 4.11.6-3. ��
��
�
�
b. The longitudinal reinforcing in the��inner column shall meet all the design ��
7-B-1 .3 Seismic
checks in the AASHTO � �� 1��
�� and� AASHTO LRFD. Some ��
specific ��of� �
checks
��
�
the inner column (inner core) will be addressed as follows:
i. A shear friction shall�be�met
check ��
7-B-1 .4
�
� using
�
��
the larger of the overstrength
� � �
plastic shear (Vpo) or the ultimate shear demand from strength load cases
at the hinge location. The area��
of longitudinal inner column reinforcement,
7-B-1 .5A �11 � ��
Ast, in excess of that required in∆�the tensile zone for flexural resistance
(usually taken as ½ the total longitudinal
��
bars) may be used for the
7-B-1 .5B
required shear friction�33 �
reinforcement, ��
Avf.
�∆�
ii. The flexural capacity of the inner column shall be designed to resist the
��
strength load cases and
7-B-1 .6A meet
�� cracking
��
criteria of the service load cases.
��
Special consideration shall be given to construction staging load cases
where the column stability
7-B-1 .6B �� depends
��on completion of portions of the
��
superstructure. ��
7-B-1 .7 �� 11 � ∆� � �1� � �� 1 � ∆� � ��
7-B-1 .8 �� 33 � ∆� � �3� � �� 3 � ∆� � ��

��
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 7-B-1 .9 �1� � �� Page 7-43
July 2019 ��
�
iii. The axial resistance of the inner column shall meet the demands of
strength load cases assuming the outer concrete has cracked and spalled
off. The gross area, Ag, shall be the area contained inside the spiral
reinforcement.
iv. The inner core shall be designed and detailed to meet all applicable
requirements of AASHTO Seismic Section 8.
2. Transverse Reinforcement
a. The portion of the transverse reinforcement for the inner core, inside
the larger column dimension (above the foundation), shall meet all the
requirements of the AASHTO Seismic and AASHTO LRFD. The demand shall
be based on the larger of the overstrength plastic shear demand (Vpo) of the
inner column or the ultimate shear demand from strength load cases at the
hinge location. The transverse reinforcement shall be extended to the top of
the longitudinal reinforcement for the inner column (Lns).
b. The portion of transverse reinforcement for the inner core, in the
foundation, shall meet the minimum requirements of the AASHTO Seismic,
Section 8.8.8, for compression members, based on the dimensions of the
inner column. This reinforcement shall be extended to the bend radius of the
of the longitudinal inner column reinforcement for footings or as required for
column-shaft connections.
c. A gap in the inner column transverse reinforcement shall be sized to allow
the foundation top mat reinforcement and foundation concrete to be
placed prior to setting the upper portion of the transverse inner column
reinforcement. This gap shall be limited to 5″; a larger gap will require the
WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer’s approval. The spiral reinforcement above
the footing shall be placed within 1″ of the top of footing to reduce the
required gap size. The WSDOT Spiral termination details will be required at
each end of this gap, the top of the upper transverse reinforcement, but not
the bottom of the lower transverse reinforcement with spread footings.
3. Analytical Plastic Hinge Region
a. The analytical plastic hinge length of the reduced column section shall be
based on horizontally isolated flared reinforced concrete columns, using
Equation 4.11.6-3 of the AASHTO Seismic Specifications.
b. The end of the column which does not have a reduced column section shall
be based on Equation 4.11.6-1 of the AASHTO Seismic Specifications.

July 2019
B. Outer Concrete Column

1. The WSDOT Bridge and Structures Office normal practices and procedures shall
be met for the column design, with the following exceptions:
i. The end with the reduced column shall be detailed to meet the seismic
requirements of a plastic hinge region. This will ensure that if a plastic hinge
mechanism is transferred into the large column shape, it will be detailed to
develop such hinge. The plastic shear this section shall be required to resist
shall be the same as that of the inner column section.
ii. The WSDOT spiral termination detail shall be placed in the large column
at the reduced section end, in addition to other required locations.
iii. In addition to the plastic hinge region requirements at the reduced column
end, the outer column spiral reinforcement shall meet the requirements
of the WSDOT Noncontact Lap Splices in Bridge Column-Shaft Connections.
The k factor shall be taken as 0.5 if the column axial load, after moment
distribution, is greater than 0.10ƒ′cAg and taken as 1.0 if the column axial
load is in tension. Ag shall be taken as the larger column section. Linear
interpolation may be used between these two values.
2. The column end without the reduced column section shall be designed with
WSDOT practices for a traditional column, but shall account for the reduced
overstrength plastic shear, applied over the length of the column, from the
overstrength plastic capacities at each column end.
Figure 7.3.7-1 Reduced Column Section at Bottom of Column



























 

July 2019
C. Gap in Concrete at Reduced Column Section

The gap shall be minimized, but shall not be less than 2″. It shall also be designed
to accommodate the larger of 1.5 times the calculated service, strength or extreme
event elastic rotation demand or the plastic rotation capacity, as determined from an
inelastic pushover analysis. In no loading condition shall the edge of the larger column
section contact the footing.
The gap shall be constructed with a material sufficiently strong to support the wet
concrete condition. The material in the gap must keep soil or debris out of the gap
for the life of the structure. This is especially important if the gap is to be buried and
inspection access is difficult. If a filler material is used in this gap which can transfer
compressive forces, then the gap shall be increased to account for this compressive
force. If a filler material can meet construction and service requirements, it can be
left in place after construction. Otherwise the gap shall be cleared and covered,
or the gap shall be filled with a material that meets the service requirements. See
Figure 7.3.7-2.
Figure 7.3.7-2 Open Gap Detail












 
 



July 2019
7.4 Crossbeams
7.4.1 General Design
The following is the recommended procedure for strength design and load rating of
a two-stage, integral, non-prestressed crossbeam at multicolumn intermediate piers
supporting precast superstructures. The procedure is based on beam theory for a tension-
controlled element, which is an acceptable method for design and load rating. The strut
and tie method is also an acceptable procedure.
A. Stage I Design
1. Obtain load effects on the lower stage I crossbeam. The dead loads on the
crossbeam typically include the self-weight of the lower crossbeam, girders,
diaphragms, bridge deck, and the dead load from the upper stage II portion of
the crossbeam. Additionally:
• A construction load equal to 15 psf over the entire deck area shall be
included in the Strength I and III load combinations. This construction load is
intended to account for formwork, work decks, miscellaneous materials and
equipment, and any construction related live loads (Bidwell finishing machine,
etc.). The load factor for the construction load shall be in accordance with
Section 3.6.
• Strength IV, which is the load combination relating to very high dead load to
live load force effects, need not be considered for this condition as clarified
in the 7th Edition of the AASTHO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
• Torsion due to unbalanced loading on the stage I crossbeam shall be
considered. The unbalanced cases shall include at a minimum, the case where
all girders are set on one side of the pier and the case where all girders are in
place on both sides but the deck is only placed on one side of the pier.
2. Design the longitudinal reinforcement in the top and bottom of the lower
crossbeam for the controlling strength load case.
3. Design the transverse reinforcement in the lower crossbeam considering the
controlling strength shear demands, including the construction load previously
described. Only the transverse reinforcement that is fully enclosed and anchored
within the stage I crossbeam shall be considered to be effective.
4. Check minimum flexural and shear reinforcement, crack control by distribution of
flexural steel, and temperature and shrinkage requirements.
B. Stage II Design
1. The stage II crossbeam is full depth and fully composite with the stage I lower
portion. Apply the total DC, DW, LL, TU, and all other applicable load effects
on the stage II crossbeam, including loads which were applied to the stage
I crossbeam. This is a simplified procedure assuming the entire full depth
crossbeam is cast monolithic, and it may imply some load redistribution. The
construction load of 15 psf need not be considered in the stage II analysis.

July 2019
2. Design the top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement for the controlling
strength load case. For the bottom reinforcement, use the largest required steel
area for either the stage I or stage II case. The crossbeam may either beChapter
Substructure Design
treated
7
2. Design the top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement for the
as a rectangular section, or the effective width of the deck can be considered as controlling strength
load case. For the bottom reinforcement, use the largest required steel area for
a “T” section. The top longitudinal reinforcement in the stage I lower crossbeam
either the stage I or stage II case. The crossbeam may either be treated as a
is typically ignored.
rectangular section, or the effective width of the deck can be considered as a “T”
3. Design the transverse
section. The reinforcement
top longitudinal for the combination
reinforcement in the stageof the controlling
I lower crossbeam is
typically ignored.
strength load case. For most crossbeams, torsion in the stage II analysis can
be ignored.3.TheDesign the transverse
concrete shear reinforcement
resistance shall for thebe
combination
computed of the controlling
assuming the full
strength load case. For most crossbeams, torsion in the stage II analysis can be
depth section. The transverse steel shear resistance shall be based on the sum
ignored. The concrete shear resistance shall be computed assuming the full depth
of Vs1 and Vs2.section.
The Vs1 resistance shall be based on the shear steel and depth
The transverse steel shear resistance shall be based on the sum of Vs1 and
dv from the stage
Vs2. I The
crossbeam. The
Vs1 resistance Vs2beresistance
shall based on theshall
shear be
steelbased on dthe
and depth shear
v from the
steel that runsstage
full Idepth and a
crossbeam. The V d v s2 resistance shall be based on the shear steel thatof
value corresponding to the full depth the
runs
crossbeam. Each vertical
full depth and leg
a dv of transverse
value reinforcement
corresponding to the full depthshall
of theonly be considered
crossbeam. Each
in either Vs1 orvertical
Vs2, never both. In the
leg of transverse zones where
reinforcement girders
shall only are located,
be considered in eitherthe
Vs1 outer
or
rows of full depth shear reinforcement is terminated. For inner rows of full depth
V s2 , never both. In the zones where girders are located, the outer rows of full
depth shear
shear reinforcement, thereinforcement
spacing may is terminated. For inner
be increased rows there
where of full depth shear
is congestion
reinforcement, the spacing may be increased where there is congestion due to
due to extended girder strands, however the designer shall maintain as much
extended girder strands, however the designer shall maintain as much shear
shear reinforcement in these zones as practicably possible.
reinforcement in these zones as practicably possible.
In the regions where shear reinforcement spacing varies across the shear
In the
failure plane, the regions where
resistance mayshear
bereinforcement
determinedspacingbasedvaries across
on the the shearshear
average failure
plane, the resistance may be determined based on the average
reinforcement area per unit length within the shear failure plane. The average shear reinforcement
area per unit length within the shear failure plane. The average shear
shear reinforcement area per unit length may be determined as follows:
reinforcement area per unit length may be determined as follows:
𝐴𝐴
𝐴𝐴𝑣𝑣 ∑ � 𝑣𝑣 � 𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖
𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖 7.4.1-1
� � =
𝑐𝑐 𝑎𝑎𝑣𝑣𝑎𝑎 𝑑𝑑𝑣𝑣 cot 𝑐𝑐
where:
Where:
Av = area of shear reinforcement
Av = area of sshear reinforcement
= spacing of shear reinforcement
s = spacingaofi shear reinforcement
= horizontal distance of shear plane crossing the stirrup zone i
ai d = effective shear
= horizontal distance of shear plane
v depth crossing the stirrup zone i
cotθ = for the simplified method, θ = 45 degrees and cotθ = 1.0
dv = effective shear depth
cotθ = for
Seethe simplified
Figure 7.4.1-1. method,
For deep θ = 45 degrees
girders, and cotθ
the shear failure = at
plane 1.045 degrees will
typically run beyond the girder width and will intersect shear reinforcement on
See Figure 7.4.1-1. For
either side of deep girders,
the girder. the shear
For smaller depth failure plane
girders, such at 45 degrees
as WF42Gs, will
this average
typically run beyond the girder
shear reinforcement width
method mayandnotwill intersect
suffice and moreshear reinforcement
steel will on
need to be placed
in the girder zones, regardless of congestion constraints.
either side of the girder. For smaller depth girders, such as WF42Gs, this average
shear reinforcement method
The concrete may notVsuffice
shear resistance, and more steel will need to be
c, shall be based on the depth dv from the stage II
placed in thecrossbeam.
girder zones, regardless of congestion constraints.
The concrete shear resistance, Vc, shall be based on the depth dv from the stage
II crossbeam.

December 2015

July 2019
Figure 7.4.1-1 Effective Crossbeam Shear Reinforcement

DESIGN SECTION
Av/s ZONE 3
NOTIONAL SHEAR CRACK
Av/s ZONE 2
Av/s ZONE 1
COLUMN
a1 a2 a3
dv/2 dv/2
4. Check minimum flexural and shear reinforcement, crack control by distribution of

flexural steel, and temperature and shrinkage requirements.
C. Other Crossbeam Types
Figure 7.4.1-1
A special case of two stage integral crossbeam is the single column “hammer head”
type crossbeams. A similar methodology can be employed for these crossbeams.
The top flexural reinforcement in the stage I section is designed for the applicable
stage I loads. In the stage II analysis, the stage I and stage II loads are applied to the
full depth section and the top reinforcement in the full depth composite section
shall be designed for the total stage I and II demands. The stage I top reinforcement
can be considered in the stage II analysis, although it may not be very effective. The
section can be considered rectangular or as a “T” section by including deck steel
reinforcement within the effective width.
Although not discussed here, capacity protection of integral crossbeams will likely
control the final design. The analysis should treat the full depth crossbeam as if it was
cast monolithic. Various analytical methods can be utilized to obtain the demands
in the crossbeam from the column plastic moment and shear, and they shall be
determined by the designer.
The analysis and design for prestressed girder expansion pier crossbeams and most
crossbeams for steel plate and box girder bridges is straightforward and consists of
only one stage. All dead and live loads are applied directly to the crossbeam. The
designer should consider conditions where torsion may be induced by unbalanced
loading during the construction and/or permanent phases. The 15 psf construction
load shall not be included with any vehicle live load combinations.
Load rating of the integral 2-stage crossbeams shall follow the methods described for
the Stage II analysis using the applicable load rating live loads.

July 2019
7.5 Abutment Design and Details

7.5.1 General
Bridge abutments support the superstructure and roadway embankment enhancing
serviceability of the superstructure, and can potentially enhance seismic response of the
bridge. Design of the abutments needs to consider layout and geometry of the abutment,
superstructure loads and movements, drainage, approach slab, and seismic effects. Water
flow and possible scour need also be considered for bridges crossing waterways.
A. Abutment Types
There are five abutment types described in the following section that have been used
by the Bridge and Structures Office. Conventional stub and cantilever abutments on
spread footings, piles, or shafts are the preferred abutment type for WSDOT bridges.
The representative types are intended for guidance only and may be varied to suit the
requirements of the bridge being designed.
Significant measures may be required to accommodate bridge security and
deter inappropriate access to the bridge abutment areas. Designs may include
steel security fences or concrete curtain walls. Configuring the land form at the
abutment or increasing the stem wall height to deter access may also be considered.
Where required, coordinate with the State Bridge and Structures Architect during
final design.
1. Stub Abutments
Stub abutments are short abutments where the distance from the girder seat to
top of footing is less than approximately 4 feet, see Figure 7.5.1-1. The footing
and wall can be considered as a continuous inverted T-beam. The analysis of
this type abutment shall include investigation into both bending and shear
stresses parallel to centerline of bearing. If the superstructure is relatively deep,
earth pressure combined with longitudinal forces from the superstructure may
become significant.
Figure 7.5.1-1 Stub Abutments
STUB 'L' ABUTMENT STUB ABUTMENT
Figure 7.5.1-1
July 2019
2. Cantilever Abutments
If the height of the wall from the bearing seat down to the bottom of the footing
exceeds the clear distance between the girder bearings, the assumed 45° lines of
influence from the girder reactions will overlap, and the dead load and live load
from the superstructure can be assumed equally distributed over the abutment
width. The design may then be carried out on a per-foot basis. The primary
structural action takes place normal to the abutment, and the bending moment
effect parallel to the abutment may be neglected in most cases. The wall is
assumed to be a cantilever member fixed at the top of the footing and subjected
to axial, shear, and bending loads see Figure 7.5.1-2.
Figure 7.5.1-2 Cantilever Abutments
ABUTMENT
WALL
CANTILEVER 'L' CANTILEVER

ABUTMENT ABUTMENT
3. Rigid Frame Abutments

Abutments that are part of a rigid frame are generically shown in Figure 7.5.1-3.
At-Rest earth pressures (EH) will apply to these structures. The abutment design
should include the live load impact factor from the superstructure. However,
impact shall not be included in the footing design. The rigid frame itself should be
considered restrained against sidesway for live load only. AASHTO LRFD Chapter
12 addresses loading and analysis of rigid frames that are buried (box culverts).
Figure 7.5.1-3 Figure

Rigid Frame 7.5.1-2
Abutment
RIGID FRAME
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 ABUTMENT Page 7-51
July 2019
4. Bent-Type Abutments
An abutment that includes a bent cap supported on columns or extended piles
or shafts is shown in Figure 7.5.1-4. For structural reasons it may be required to
construct a complete wall behind a bridge abutment prior to bridge construction.
Bent-type abutments may be used where the abutment requires protection
from lateral and vertical loads and settlement. This configuration shall only be
used with the approval of the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer for abutments
30 ft or greater in height. It shall not be used where initial construction cost is
the only determining incentive. The approach embankment wall shall have a
concrete fascia.
A bridge approach slab shall span a maximum of 6′-0″ between the back of
pavement seat and the face of the approach embankment wall. The approach
slab shall be designed as a beam pinned at the back of pavement seat. The
approach slab shall support traffic live loads and traffic barrier reactions. The
approach embankment wall shall support the vertical live load surcharge. The
approach slab shall not transfer loads to the approach embankment wall facing.
The minimum gap between the back of the columns, piles, or shafts and the
retained structure shall be 2’-0” to allow for inspection access.
An enclosing fascia wall is required to prohibit unwanted access with associated
public health, maintenance staff safety, and law enforcement problems. The
design shall include a concrete fascia enclosing the columns and void. The fascia
shall have bridge inspection access on the bridge side of the columns, piles, or
shafts. The access door shall be a minimum 3′-6″ square with the sill located
2′-6″ above finished grade. Contact the State Bridge and Structures Architect for
configuration and concrete surface treatments. Ventilation shall be incorporated
into the design of the enclosed space. There shall be a minimum of two 4 inch
diameter air vent openings near the top of the enclosing fascia wall. The air vents
shall be spaced approximately 5’-0” apart and shall be on either side of the access
door. Air vents shall conform to Figure 5.2.6-2. Design shall be reviewed and
approved by the WSDOT Bridge Preservation Office and the State Bridge and
Structures Architect for access and safety requirements.
When approved by the State Bridge and Structures Architect, the columns may
be located just outside the fascia. In this case, the access criteria of Section 5
shall be followed.

July 2019
Figure 7.5.1-4 Bent-Type Abutment

6'-0"
BACK OF PAV'T SEAT
MAX.
BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE
CONCRETE FASCIA WALL

FASCIA
2'-0"
MIN.
ACCESS DOOR
COLUMN
5. Isolated Abutments Bent Type Abutment

Figure 7.5.1-4
An isolated abutment is an abutment that utilizes a separate retaining system to
support the embankment and is shown in Figure 7.5.1-5. The gap between the
abutment and the retaining system shall be wide enough to avoid contact of the
two isolated structures due to movements caused by earthquakes, but shall not
be less than 6 inches. This configuration shall only be used with the approval of
the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer for abutments 30 ft or greater in height. The
approach embankment wall does not require a fascia.
A curtain wall shall be designed to enclose the gap on the bridge side of the
retaining system. This curtain wall is generally attached to the abutment. There
shall not be any access designed within the abutment or curtain wall. However,
the curtain wall shall have a future blockout location established in the plans.
The size of this future blockout shall be a minimum of the gap dimension or
3’-0” square and shall be centered on the gap. Ventilation shall be incorporated
into the design of the enclosed space. Access design shall be reviewed and
approved by the WSDOT Bridge Preservation Office and the State Bridge and
Structures Architect.
The approach slab requirements from Section 4 are applicable to this type of
abutment.

July 2019
Figure 7.5.1-5 Isolated Abutment

6'-0"
BACK OF PAV'T SEAT
MAX.
BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE
BRIDGE ABUTMENT
7.5.2 Abutments Supported By Mechanically-Stabilized Earth Walls

Bridge abutments may be supported on mechanically-stabilize earth (MSE) walls,
Figure
including geosynthetic retaining walls (with 7.5.1-5structural facing), structural
and without
earth walls and reinforced soil. Abutments supported on these walls shall be designed in
accordance with the requirements of this manual and the following documents (listed in
order of importance):
1. Geotechnical Design Manual (GDM) Section 15.5.3.5.
2. AASHTO LRFD.
3. Design and Construction of Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Soil
Slopes, Volume I and II, FHWA-NHI-10-024, FHWA-NHI-10-025.

July 2019
Bridges with MSE supported abutments shall be designed as one of two types described
below, and shall satisfy the associated design requirements.
A. Single-span bridges with precast slab superstructures supported directly on
reinforced soil
These bridges shall conform to the following requirements, see Figures 7.5.2-1
and 7.5.2-2:
1. Walls supporting abutments shall be special designed wall systems, and shall
conform to GDM Section 15.5.3.5 MSE Wall Supported Abutments. Additionally,
the top 3 rows of dry-cast modular concrete blocks shall be grouted with #4
rebar.
2. The span length shall not exceed 60 feet.
3. The superstructure shall include a 5″ thick C.I.P. composite topping.
4. The end of the precast superstructure shall be at least 4 feet from the back face
of the MSE wall. Minimum seat width requirements shall be provided on the
reinforced soil bearing area.
5. A foam board detail shall be used to create a 1 foot horizontal buffer between
the bearing area and the wall facing.
6. The vertical gap between the top of wall facing and the bottom of superstructure
shall be 4″ or 2 percent of the abutment height, whichever is greater.
7. Prestressing strands in the zone bearing on reinforced soil shall have a minimum
concrete cover of 2″. Transverse reinforcing steel within this zone shall have a
minimum concrete cover of 1½″. All prestressing strand shall be removed to a 2″
depth from the end of the slab. The voids shall be patched with epoxy grout.
8. Where voided slab superstructures are used, the slab section shall be solid from
the end of the slab to at least 1 foot in front of the fascia.
9. The abutment shall be designed for a bearing pressure at service loads not
to exceed 2.0 tons per square foot (TSF) and a factored load at strength and
extreme limit states not to exceed 3.5 TSF. The bearing pressure may be
increased to 3.0 TSF at service loads and 4.5 TSF at strength and extreme limit
states if a vertical settlement monitoring program is conducted in accordance
with WSDOT GDM Section 15.5.3.5.
10. Bridge approach slabs may be omitted.

July 2019
Figure 7.5.2-1 Reinforced Soil Abutment with Dry-Cast Modular

Block Facing
PRECAST VOIDED OR
SLAB SUPERSTRUCTURE
4'-0" SURFACING
1'-0" MIN.
MIN.
8"x12" PRECAST CONCRETE

BEAM, FULL WIDTH OF SLAB.
JOINT FILLER
COMPRESSIBLE FOAM BLOCK
(PROVIDE MIN. 4 IN. THICKNESS)
#4 REBAR, GROUTED IN PLACE
DRY-CAST CONCRETE
MODULAR BLOCK FACING.
CONCRETE LEVELING PAD
Figure 7.5.2-2 Reinforced Soil Abutment with Full-Height Concrete Facing

PRECAST VOIDED ORFigure 7.5.2-1
SLAB SUPERSTRUCTURE
4'-0" SURFACING
1'-0" MIN.
MIN.
8"x12" PRECAST CONCRETE

BEAM, FULL WIDTH OF SLAB.
JOINT FILLER
COMPRESSIBLE FOAM BLOCK
(PROVIDE MIN. 4 IN. THICKNESS)
PRECAST OR CIP
CONCRETE FACING
CONCRETE LEVELING PAD
Figure 7.5.2-2
July 2019
B. Bridges with spread footing abutments supported by a geosynthetic wall or SE wall

These bridges shall conform to the following requirements, see Figure 7.5.2-3:
1. Walls shall be 30 feet or less in total height, which includes the retained soil
height up to the bottom of the embedded spread footing.
2. For SE walls, the front edge of the bridge footing shall be placed 4 feet minimum
from the back face of the fascia panel. For geosynthetic retaining walls with
a wrapped face, the front edge of the bridge footing shall be placed 2 feet
minimum from the back face of the fascia panel.
3. The abutment footing shall be covered by at least 6 inch of soil for frost
protection.
4. The superstructure of continuous span bridges shall be designed for differential
settlement between piers.
5. Abutment spread footings shall be designed for bearing pressure at service loads
not to exceed 2.0 TSF and factored load at strength and extreme limit states not
to exceed 3.5 TSF. The bearing pressure may be increased to 3.0 TSF at service
loads and 4.5 TSF at strength and extreme limit states if a vertical settlement
monitoring program is conducted in accordance with the Geotechnical Design
Manual Section 15.5.3.5.
6. Walls supporting abutments shall be special designed wall systems, and shall
conform to GDM Section 15.5.3.5 MSE Wall Supported Abutments. Additionally,
the top 3 rows of dry-cast modular concrete blocks shall be grouted with #4
rebar.
7. Concrete slope protection shall be provided. Fall protection shall be provided in
accordance with Design Manual Chapter 730.
8. The presence of a landform shelf beneath the superstructure between the
abutment face and top of wall may constitute an attractive nuisance. Limiting
access to this area per BDM Chapter 2.8, may also be required. Where
required, coordinate with the State Bridge and Structures Architect for bridge
security issues.
Deviations from the design requirements require approval from the State Bridge
Design Engineer and the State Geotechnical Engineer.

July 2019
Figure 7.5.2-3 Spread Footing on SE Wall or Geosynthetic Wall
FALL PROTECTION OR
SECURITY FENCING
CONCRETE SLOPE
PROTECTION
1% SLOPE
A
1'-0"
MIN.
MIN.
B
6"
C
A. 4'-0" MIN. FOR SE WALLS (PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL FACE OR

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FACE) AND 2'-0" MIN. FOR SPECIAL
DESIGNED GEOSYNTHETIC RETAINING WALLS WITH WRAPPED FACE.
B. 3'-0" MIN. FOR GIRDER BRIDGES AND 5'-0" MIN. FOR NON-GIRDER,
SLAB, AND BOX GIRDER BRIDGES. (SEE SECTION 7.5.3)
C. 30'-0" MAXIMUM (SEE SECTION 7.5.2B.1)
7.5.3 Embankment at Abutments

The minimum clearances for the embankment at the front face of abutments shall be
as indicated on Standard Plans A-50.10.00 through A-50.40.00. At the ends of the
abutment, the fill may be contained with wing walls or in the case of concrete structures,
placed against the exterior girders.
The minimum clearance between the bottom of the superstructure and the embankment
below shall be 3’-0” for girder bridges and 5’-0” for non-girder, slab, and box
girder bridges.
The presence of a horizontal landform shelf beneath the superstructure at the abutment
face may constitute an attractive nuisance. Limiting access to superstructure, by
increasing the stem wall height, may also be required. Where required, coordinate
with the State Bridge and Structures Architect for bridge security issues.
July 2019
7.5.4 Abutment Loading

In general, bridge abutment loading shall be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Chapter
3 and 11. The following simplifications and assumptions may be applied to the abutment
design. See Section 7.7.4 for a force diagram of typical loads as they are applied to an
abutment spread footing.
A. Dead Load - DC
Approach slab dead load reaction taken as 2 kips/foot of wall applied at the
pavement seat.
B. Live Load - LL
Live load impact does not apply to the abutment. For bridge approach slab live load
assumptions, see Section 10.6. If bridge approach slabs are not to be constructed
in the project (e.g. bride approach slab details are not included in the bridge sheets of
the Plans) a live load surcharge (LS) applies.
C. Earth Pressure - EH, EV
Active earth pressure (EH) and the unit weight of backfill on the heel and toe (EV)
will be provided in a geotechnical report. The toe fill shall be included in the analysis
for overturning if it adds to overturning.
Passive earth pressure resistance (EH) in front of a footing may not be dependable
due to potential for erosion, scour, or future excavation. Passive earth pressure may
be considered for stability at the strength limit state only below the depth that is not
likely to be disturbed over the structure’s life. The Geotechnical Branch should be
contacted to determine if passive resistance may be considered. The top two feet
of passive earth pressure should be ignored.
D. Earthquake Load - EQ
Seismic superstructure loads shall be transmitted to the substructure through
bearings, girder stops or restrainers. As an alternative, the superstructure may
be rigidly attached to the substructure. The Extreme Event I load factor for all
EQ induced loads shall be 1.0.
For bearing pressure and wall stability checks, the seismic inertial force of the
abutment, PIR, shall be combined with the seismic lateral earth pressure force, PAE, as
described in AASHTO LRFD Section 11.6.5.1.
For structural design of the abutment, the seismic inertial force, PIR, shall be
combined with the seismic lateral earth pressure force, PAE, as described in
AASHTO LRFD Section 11.6.5.1 for stability checks. The inertial force shall include
the inertia of the concrete, but need not include the inertia of the soil above the heel.
E. Bearing Forces - TU
For strength design, the bearing shear forces shall be based on ½ of the annual
temperature range. This force is applied in the direction that causes the worst
case loading.
For extreme event load cases, calculate the maximum friction force (when the bearing
slips) and apply in the direction that causes the worst case loading.

July 2019
7.5.5 Temporary Construction Load Cases

A. Superstructure Built after Backfill at Abutment
If the superstructure is to be built after the backfill is placed at the abutments,
the resulting temporary loading would be the maximum horizontal force with the
minimum vertical force. During the abutment design for all abutment types except
bent-type or isolated, a load case shall be considered to check the stability and sliding
of abutments after placing backfill but prior to superstructure placement. This load
case is intended as a check for a temporary construction stage, and not meant to be a
controlling load case that would govern the final design of the abutment and footing.
This loading will generally determine the tensile reinforcement in the top of the
footing heel.
If this load case check is found to be satisfactory, a note shall be added to the
general notes in the contract plans and the contractor will not be required to make a
submittal requesting approval for early backfill placement. This load case shall include
a 2′-0″ deep soil surcharge for the backfill placement equipment (LS) as covered by
the Standard Specifications Section 2-03.3(14)I.
B. Wing Wall Overturning
It is usually advantageous in sizing the footing to release the falsework from
under the wing walls after some portion of the superstructure load is applied to
the abutment. A note can cover this item, when applicable, in the sequence of
construction on the plans.
7.5.6 Abutment Bearings and Girder Stops

All structures shall be provided with some means of restraint against lateral displacement
at the abutments due to temperature, shrinkage, wind, earth pressure, and earthquake
loads, etc. Such restraints may be in the form of concrete girder stops with vertical
elastomeric pads, concrete hinges, or bearings restrained against movement.
All prestressed girder bridges in Western Washington (within and west of the Cascade
mountain range) shall have girder stops between all girders at abutments and intermediate
expansion piers. This policy is based on fact that the February 28, 2001 Nisqually
earthquake caused significant damage to girder stops at bridges where girder stops were
not provided between all girders. In cases where girder stops were cast prior to placement
of girders and the 3″ grout pads were placed after setting the girders, the 3″ grout pads
were severely damaged and displaced from their original position.
A. Abutment Bearings
Longitudinal forces from the superstructure are normally transferred to the
abutments through the bearings. The calculated longitudinal movement shall be used
to determine the shear force developed by the bearing pads. The shear modulus of
Neoprene at 70°F (21°C) shall be used for determining the shear force. However,
the force transmitted through a bearing pad shall be limited to that which causes
the bearing pad to slip. Normally, the maximum percentage of the vertical load
reaction transferred in shear is assumed to be 6 percent for PTFE sliding bearings and
20 percent for elastomeric bearing pads. For semi-integral abutments, the horizontal
earth pressure acting on the end diaphragm is transferred through the bearings.

July 2019
When the force transmitted through the bearing pads is very large, the designer
should consider increasing the bearing pad thickness, using PTFE sliding bearings
and/or utilizing the flexibility of the abutment as a means of reducing the horizontal
design force. When the flexibility of the abutment is considered, it is intended that a
simple approximation of the abutment deformation be made.
For semi-integral abutments with overhanging end diaphragms at the Extreme
Event, the designer shall consider that longitudinal force may be transmitted through
the end diaphragm. If the gap provided is less than the longitudinal displacement
demand, assume the end diaphragm is in contact with abutment wall. In this case, the
bearing force shall not be added to seismic earth pressure force.
B. Bearing Seats
The bearing seats shall be wide enough to accommodate the size of the bearings
used with a minimum edge dimension of 3″ and satisfy the requirements of
AASHTO LRFD Section 4.7.4.4. On L abutments, the bearing seat shall be sloped
away from the bearings to prevent ponding at the bearings. The superelevation and
profile grade of the structure should be considered for drainage protection. Normally,
a ¼″ drop across the width of the bearing seat is sufficient.
C. Transverse Girder Stops
Transverse girder stops are required for all abutments in order to transfer lateral loads
from the superstructure to the abutment. Abutments shall normally be considered
as part of the Earthquake Resisting System (ERS). Girder stops shall be full width
between girder flanges except to accommodate bearing replacement requirements
as specified in Chapter 9. The girder stop shall be designed to resist loads at the
Extreme Limit State for the earthquake loading, Strength loads (wind etc.) and any
transverse earth pressure from skewed abutments, etc. Girder stops are designed
using shear friction theory and the shear strength resistance factor shall be φs = 0.9.
The possibility of torsion combined with horizontal shear when the load does not
pass through the centroid of the girder stop shall also be investigated.
Transverse stiffness of abutments may be considered in the overall dynamic response
of bridge systems on a case-by-case basis upon Bridge Design Engineer approval as
specified in BDM Section 5.2.3.
The detail shown in Figure 7.5.6-1 may be used for prestressed girder bridges.
Prestressed girders shall be placed in their final position before girder stops are cast
to eliminate alignment conflicts between the girders and girder stops. Elastomeric
girder stop pads shall run the full length of the girder stop. All girder stops shall
provide ⅛″ clearance between the prestressed girder flange and the elastomeric
girder stop pad.
For skewed bridges with semi-integral or end type A diaphragms, the designer shall
evaluate the effects of earth pressure forces on the elastomeric girder stop pads.
These pads transfer the skew component of the earth pressure to the abutment
without restricting the movement of the superstructure in the direction parallel to
centerline. The performance of elastomeric girder stop pads shall be investigated at
Service Limit State. In some cases bearing assemblies containing sliding surfaces may
be necessary to accommodate large superstructure movements.

July 2019
Figure 7.5.6-1 Girder Stop Details
¢ GIRDER
Â" GAP BETWEEN

ELASTOMERIC GIRDER STOP
PAD AND GIRDER (TYP.)
CONSTR. JOINT WITH

ROUGHENED SURFACE
GIRDER STOP
½" THICK TRANSVERSE

ELASTOMERIC GIRDER
3" MIN.
STOP PAD (TYP.)
Ð" FROM FACE OF ELASTOMERIC BEARING PAD

P.S.G. TO FACE OF GROUT PAD
GIRDER STOP (TYP.)
GIRDER STOP DETAIL

7.5.7 Abutment Expansion Joints
The compressibility of abutment expansion joints shall be considered in the design of the
abutment when temperature, shrinkage, and earthquake forces may increase the design
load. For structures without abutment expansion joints, the earth pressure against the
end diaphragm is transmitted through the superstructure.
7.5.8 Open Joint Details

Vertical expansion joints extending from the top of footings to the top of the abutment
are usually required between abutments and adjacent retaining walls to handle
anticipated movements. The expansion joint is normally filled with premolded joint filler
which is not water tight. There may be circumstances when this joint must be water tight;
⅛ butyl rubber may be used to cover the joint. The open joint in the barrier shall contain
a compression seal to create a watertight joint. Figure 7.5.8-1 shows typical details that
may be used. Aesthetic considerations may require that vertical expansion joints between
abutments and retaining walls be omitted. This is generally possible if the retaining wall is
less than 60 feet long.
The footing beneath the joint may be monolithic or cast with a construction joint. In
addition, dowel bars may be located across the footing joint parallel to the wall elements
to guard against differential settlement or deflection.
On semi-integral abutments with overhanging end diaphragms, the open joints must be
protected from the fill spilling through the joint. Normally butyl rubber is used to seal the
openings. See the end diaphragm details in the Appendices of Chapter 5 for details.

July 2019
Figure 7.5.8-1 Open Joint Details Between Abutment and Retaining Walls
FACE OF TRAFFIC
Â"X1'-0" BUTYL RUBBER B BARRIER
SHEETING. BOND WITH COMPRESSION
APPR'D. ADHESIVE CURB LINE SEAL * 1"
10½"
2¼"
EDGE OF ½" OPEN JT.
WALL AT TOP OPEN JOINT IN
TRAFFIC BARRIER
½"
JOINT DETAIL SECTION A
H DRILL ½"ø HOLE THROUGH SEAL. MAKE

SURE THAT THE TOP MEMBRANE IS
NOT DAMAGED. THEN CUT OUT WEDGE.
* COMPRESSION SEAL
D.S. BROWN CV-1500 ¼" THICK SYNTHETIC CLOSED
WATSON BOWMAN WA 150 CELL EXPANDED RUBBER JOINT
2/3 H FILLER CEMENTED TO JOINT SEAL
45° COMPERSSION SEAL *
FILL OPENING BETWEEN

COMPRESSION SEAL AND ¼" THICK SYNTHETIC CLOSED
BUTYL RUBBER SHEETING CELL EXPANDED RUBBER JOINT
WITH AN APPR'D. EXPANSION FILLER CEMENTED TO JOINT SEAL
JOINT SEALANT
1'-0"
TOP OF RDWY.
Â"x1'-0" BUTYL RUBBER

SHEETING FROM TOP OF
RDWY. TO TOP OF RET. COMPERSSION SEAL *
WALL FOOTING
SECTION B
Figure 7.5.8-1

July 2019
7.5.9 Construction Joints

Construction joints should be provided between the footings/caps and stems of
abutments. Shear keys shall be provided at vertical construction joints and at any
construction joint that requires shear transfer. To simplify construction, vertical
construction joints are often necessary, particularly between the abutment and adjacent
wing walls. The Standard Specifications cover the size and placement of shear keys. The
location of such joints shall be detailed on the plans. Construction joints with roughened
surface can be used at locations with horizontal joints. These should be shown on the
plans and labeled “Construction Joint With Roughened Surface.” When construction joints
are shown in the Plans for the convenience of the Contractor and are not structurally
required, they shall be indicated as optional. When construction joints are located within
the face of the abutment wall, a pour strip or an architectural reveal should be used for a
clean appearance. Details should be shown in the plans.
7.5.10 Abutment Wall Design

When the primary structural action is parallel to the superstructure or normal to the
abutment face, the wall shall be treated as a column subjected to combined axial load
and bending moment. Compressive reinforcement need not be included in the design of
cantilever walls, but the possibility of bending moment in the direction of the span as well
as towards the backfill shall be considered. A portion of the vertical bars may be cut off
where they are no longer needed for stress.
A. General
In general, horizontal reinforcement should be placed outside of vertical
reinforcement to facilitate easier placement of reinforcement.
B. Temperature and Shrinkage Reinforcement
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.10.6 shall be followed for providing the minimum
temperature and shrinkage steel near surfaces of concrete exposed to daily
temperature changes and in structural mass concrete. On abutments that are longer
than 60′, consideration should be given to have vertical construction joints to
minimize shrinkage cracks.

July 2019
C. Cross Ties
The minimum cross tie reinforcement in abutment walls, shall be #4 tie bars with
135° hooks, in accordance with AASHTO 5.10.4.3 see Figure 7.5.10-1.
Figure 7.5.10-1 Cross Tie Details
SEE "TIE
BAR DETAIL" 1'-0" MAX.
#4 TIE (TYP.)
#4 TIE (TYP.)
BOTTOM
OF WALL
6"
CONSTRUCTION JOINT WITH 2'-0" MAX. MAX.
ROUGHENED SURFACE
TIE BAR
SPACING DETAIL
TYPICAL SECTION
#4 TIES WITH 1'-0" MIN. LAP SPLICE.
SEE "TIE BAR SPACING DETAIL"
TIE EACH END OF LAP
SPLICE WITH WIRE #4 TIE
1½" MIN. 1½" MIN.

CLR. 90° BEND CLR.
135° BEND HORIZONTAL 135° BEND

BAR (TYP.)
EXTERIOR VERTICAL
FACE BAR (TYP.)
ALTERNATE TIE BAR DETAIL

TIE BAR DETAIL CONSTANT WIDTH SECTION
ALTERNATE 135 BEND EVERY OTHER TIE.
CONSTANT OR VARIABLE WIDTH SECTION
Figure 7.5.10-1

July 2019
7.5.11 Drainage and Backfilling

3″ diameter weep holes shall be provided in all bridge abutment walls. These shall be
located 6″ above the finish ground line at about 12′ on center. In cases where the vertical
distance between the top of the footing and the finish groundline is greater than 10′,
additional weep holes shall be provided 6″ above the top of the footing. No weep holes
are necessary in cantilever wing walls where a wall footing is not used.
The details for gravel backfill for wall, underdrain pipe and backfill for drain shall be
indicated on the plans. The gravel backfill for wall shall be provided behind all bridge
abutments. The underdrain pipe and gravel backfill for drain shall be provided behind all
bridge abutments except abutments on fills with a stem wall height of 5′ or less. When
retaining walls with footings are attached to the abutment, a blockout may be required for
the underdrain pipe outfall. Cooperation between Bridge and Structures Office and the
Design PE Office as to the drainage requirements is needed to guarantee proper blockout
locations.
Underdrain pipe and gravel backfill for drain are not necessary behind cantilever wing
walls. A 3′ thickness of gravel backfill for wall behind the cantilever wing walls shall be
shown in the plans.
The backfill for wall, underdrain pipe and gravel backfill for drain are not included in
bridge quantities, the size of the underdrain pipe should not be shown on the bridge
plans, as this is a Design PE Office design item and is subject to change during the design
phase. Figure 7.5.11-1 illustrates backfill details.

July 2019
Figure 7.5.11-1 Drainage and Backfill Details
A
GRAVEL BACKFILL
FOR WALL TO TOP
OF SUBGRADE
¢ 3"ø DRAINS AT
6"
WALL HEIGHT
12' CTRS.
3" COVER ADDITIONAL 3"ø DRAINS REQUIRED

WHEN WALL HEIGHT EXCEEDS 10'.
PROVIDE GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR
0"
1'-
WALL WHERE ADDITIONAL 3"ø
6"
DRAINS ARE REQUIRED.
GRAVEL BACKFILL
FOR DRAIN 3'-0"*
UNDERDRAIN PIPE
* CONSULT WITH SUPERVISOR FOR ABUTMENTS IN CUT SECTION.
3'-0"
GRAVEL BACKFILL
FOR WALLS TO TOP
OF SUBGRADE.
SECTION THROUGH WING WALL

GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAIN, GRAVEL BACKFILL
SECTION A FOR WALL, AND UNDERDRAIN PIPE NOT INCLUDED
IN BRIDGE QUANTITIES
WHERE DRAINS ARE USED

WITH RUSTICATION STRIPS
DETAIL SO DRAIN ENDS
ON THE STRIP.
Figure 7.5.11-1

July 2019
7.6 Abutment Wing Walls and Curtain Walls

Particular attention should be given to the horizontal reinforcing steel required at fixed
corners between abutment and wing/curtain walls. Since wall deflections are zero near
the abutment, curtain walls and cantilever wing walls shall assume an at-rest soil pressure.
This increased loading can normally be reduced to an Active soil pressure at a distance
(from the corner), equal to the average height of the wall under design. At this distance,
the wall deflections are assumed large enough to allow the active state soil pressures
to be developed. See Geotechnical Design Manual Section 15.4.2.7, “Active, Passive, and
At-Rest Pressures.”
7.6.1 Traffic Barrier Loads

Traffic barriers shall be rigidly attached to a bridge approach slab that is cantilevered over
the top of a wing/curtain wall or Structural Earth wall. The barrier collision load is applied
directly to the bridge approach slab. The yield line theory as specified in AASHTO LRFD
Appendix A13.3 is primarily for traffic barrier on bridge deck slabs and may not be
applicable to traffic barrier on less rigid supports, such as retaining walls.
7.6.2 Wing Wall Design

The following wing wall design items should be addressed in the Plans.
A. For strength design of wing walls, vertical loads and moments may be distributed over
10′ of the abutment wall and footing.
B. Footing thickness shall be not less than 1′-6″.
C. Exterior girder top flanges should be located (at the least) inside the curb line
at the end pier.
D. For skewed bridges, modify the details on the traffic barrier and approach slab sheet
so the expansion joint detailing agree. List appropriate manufacturers and model
numbers for the expansion joint system. Generally, a 1″ expansion joint with a 1″
open joint in the barrier is shown in the plans, unless the bridge expansion joint
design dictates otherwise.
7.6.3 Wing Wall Detailing

All wing wall reinforcement should be a vertical grid and not follow a tapered
bottom of wall. This allows for the steel to be placed in two layers that fits better
with abutment reinforcing.

July 2019
7.7 Footing Design

7.7.1 General Footing Criteria
The provisions given in this section pertain to both spread footings and pile
supported footings.
A. Minimum Cover and Footing Depth
The geotechnical report may specify a minimum footing depth in order to ensure
adequate bearing pressure. Stream crossings may require additional cover depth as
protection against scour. The HQ Hydraulic Section shall be consulted on this matter.
The end slope on the bridge approach fill is usually set at the preliminary plan stage
but affects the depth of footings placed in the fill. Figure 7.7.1-1 illustrates footing
criteria when setting footing elevations.
Figure 7.7.1-1 Guidelines for Footing Cover and Depth

July 2019
B. Pedestals
A pedestal is sometimes used as an extension of the footing in order to provide
additional depth for shear near the column. Its purpose is to provide adequate
structural depth while saving concrete. For proportions of pedestals, see Figure 7.7.1-
2. Since additional forming is required to construct pedestals, careful thought must
be given to the tradeoff between the cost of the extra forming involved and the cost
of additional footing concrete. Also, additional foundation depth may be needed for
footing cover. Whenever a pedestal is used, the plans shall note that a construction
joint will be permitted between the pedestal and the footing. This construction joint
should be indicated as a construction joint with roughened surface.
Figure 7.7.1-2 Pedestal Dimensions








7.7.2 Loads and Load Factors


The following Table 7.7.2-1 is a general application of minimum and maximum load
factors as they apply to a generic footing design. Footing design must select the maximum
or minimum Load Factors for various modes of failure for the Strength and Extreme Event
Limit States.
The dead load includes the load due to structural components and non-structural
attachments (DC), and the dead load of wearing surfaces and utilities (DW). The live load
(LL) does not include vehicular dynamic load allowance (IM).
Designers are to note, if column design uses magnified moments, then footing design
must use magnified column moments.
Table 7.7.2-1 Load Factors

Sliding and Overturning, eo Bearing Stress (ec, sv)
LLmin = 0 LLmax
DCmin, DWmin for resisting forces, DCmax, DWmax for causing forces
DCmax, DWmax for causing forces, DCmin, DWmin for resisting forces
EVmin EVmax
EHmax EHmax
LS LS

July 2019
7.7.3 Geotechnical Report Summary

The Geotechnical Branch will evaluate overall bridge site stability. Slope stability normally
applies to steep embankments at the abutment. If stability is in question, a maximum
service limit state load will be specified in the report. Bridge design will determine the
maximum total service load applied to the embankment. The total load must be less than
the load specified in the geotechnical report.
Based on the foundations required in the Preliminary Plan and structural information
available at this stage, the Report provides the following Geotechnical Engineering results.
For all design limit states, the total factored footing load must be less than the factored
resistance.
A. Bearing Resistance - Service, Strength, and Extreme Event Limit States
The nominal bearing resistance (qn) may be increased or reduced based on
previous experience for the given soils. The geotechnical report will contain the
following information:
• Nominal bearing resistance (qn) for anticipated effective footing widths, which is
the same for the strength and extreme event limit states.
• Service bearing resistance (qser) and amount of assumed settlement.
• Resistance factors for strength and extreme event limit states (fb).
• Embedment depth requirements or footing elevations to obtain the
recommended qn.
Spread footings supported on SE walls or geosynthetic walls shall be designed with
nominal bearing resistances not to exceed 6.0 ksf at service limit states and 9.0 ksf
at strength and extreme event limit states. A vertical settlement monitoring program
shall be conducted where nominal bearing resistance exceeds 4.0 ksf at service limit
states or 7.0 ksf at strength or extreme event limit states. See GDM Section 15.5.3.5
for additional requirements.
B. Sliding Resistance - Strength and Extreme Event Limit States
The geotechnical report will contain the following information to determine earth
loads and the factored sliding resistance (RR = fRn)
• Resistance factors for strength and extreme event limit states (fτ, fep)
• If passive earth pressure (Rep) is reliably mobilized on a footing: ff or Su and s’v,
and the depth of soil in front of footing that may be considered to provide passive
resistance.
C. Foundation Springs - Extreme Event Limit States
When a structural evaluation of soil response is required for a bridge analysis, the
Geotechnical Branch will determine foundation soil/rock shear modulus and Poisson’s
ratio (G and µ). These values will typically be determined for shear strain levels of 2 to
0.2 percent, which are typical strain levels for large magnitude earthquakes.

July 2019
7.7.4 Spread Footing Design

The following section is oriented toward abutment spread footing design. Spread footing
designs for intermediate piers or other applications use the same concepts with the
appropriate structural analysis. Structural designers should complete all design checks
before consulting with the Geotechnical Engineer about any design problem. There may
be several problem criteria that should be addressed in the solution.
A. Abutment Spread Footing Force Diagram
Figures 7.7.4-1 and 7.7.4-2 diagram the forces that act on abutment footings. Each
limit state design check will require calculation of a reaction (R) and the location (Xo)
or eccentricity (eo). The ultimate soil passive resistance (Qep) at the toe is determined
by the Geotechnical Engineer and is project specific.
Figure 7.7.4-1 Cantilever (End Diaphragm) Abutment Force Diagram
DC, LL, EQ
Superstructure
(super. & appr. slab)

Forces
Super. Bearing Forces

(Parallel to abut.)
Super. Bearing Forces

(Normal to Abutment)
DCabut
H
Substructure Forces
EVheel
LS PIR
EH
PAE a
EVtoe
D
Rep
Rí
ì POINT "O"
v
e XO
B/2 0
R
¢ Footing
B

July 2019
Figure 7.7.4-2 Definition and Location of Forces and Moments for

L-Abutments and Interior Footings
DC, LL (Appr. Slab )
DC, LL, EQ
(superstructure)
Superstructure Forces
(Parallel to abut.)
Substructure Forces
Superstructure Forces
(Normal to Abutment)
EV
LS heel DC
abut
H
EH
PAE a PIR
EV
toe
H/3
D
RT R
ep
ìv POINT "O"
B/2 e X
0 O
R
ALL SOIL PRESSURE RESULTANTS
¢ Footing
SHALL BE APPLIED AT THE CENTROIDS
OF THE DIAGRAMS OF PRESSURE B
ACTING ON THE ABUTMENT.
B. Bearing Stress
For geotechnical and structural footings design, the bearing stress calculation
Definition
assumes a uniform bearing and Location
pressure of Forces
distribution. anddesigns
For footing Moments
on rock, the
for L-Abutments and Interior Footings
bearing stress is based on a triangular or trapezoidal bearing pressure distribution.
The procedure to calculate bearing Figure 7.7.4.-2 in the following outline. See
stress is summarized
Abutment Spread Footing Force Diagrams for typical loads and eccentricity.
Step 1: Calculate the Resultant force (Rstr), location (Xostr) and eccentricity
for Strength (estr).
Xostr = (factored moments about the footing base)/(factored vertical loads)
Step 2A: For Footings on Soil:
Calculate the maximum soil stress (sstr) based on a uniform pressure
distribution. Note that this calculation method applies in both directions
for biaxially loaded footings. See AASHTO LRFD Section 10.6.3.1.5
for guidance on biaxial loading. The maximum footing pressure on soil
with a uniform distribution is:
sstr = R/B′ = R/2Xo = R/(B-2e), where B′ is the effective footing width.

July 2019
Step 2B: For Footings on Rock:

If the reaction is outside the middle ⅓ of the base, use a
triangular distribution.
sstr max = 2R/3 Xo, where “R” is the factored limit state reaction.
If the reaction is within the middle ⅓ of the base, use a
trapezoidal distribution.
sstr max = R/B (1+ 6 e/B)
In addition, WSDOT limits the maximum stress (P/A) applied to rock
due to vertical loads only. This is because the rock stiffness approaches
infinity relative to the footing concrete. The maximum width of uniform
stress is limited to C+2D as shown in Figure 7.7.4-3.
Step 3: Compare the factored bearing stress (sstr) to the factored bearing
resistance (fbcqn) of the soil or rock. The factored bearing stress must
be less than or equal to the factored bearing resistance.
sstr ≤ fbcqn
Step 4: Repeat steps 1 thru 3 for the Extreme Event limit state. Calculate Xoext,
eext, and sext using Extreme Event factors and compare the factored
stress to the factored bearing (fbqn).
Figure 7.7.4-3 Footings on Rock




7 .2 .3-1 �� 1��

 
 1
7 .3 .6-1 �� 3 ��


C. Failure By Sliding
7 .4 .6-1 (Q� ) is
The factored sliding resistance �
��
��
� comprised of a frictional component (φ Q ) and
�
R �� τ τ
the Geotechnical Branch may allow a passive earth pressure component (fep Qep). The
��
QR based�on
designer shall calculate7 .4 .6-2 the soil properties
��
specified in the geotechnical
report. The frictional component acts along��the
�
�� base
� � of the footing, and the passive
�
component acts on the vertical face of a buried footing element. The factored sliding
7 .4 .7-1
resistance shall be greater than or � ��to
��equal � the
�� factored
�� horizontal applied loads.
7 .7 .4-1 ��
7 .8 .1-1 � � ��
��
7 .8 .2-1 ��
��
Page 7-74 7 .9 .2-1 �� WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19
��
July 2019
��
The Strength Limit State fτ and fep are provided in the geotechnical report or
AASHTO LRFD Section 10.5.5.2.2-1. The Extreme Event Limit State Qτ and fep are
generally equal to 1.0.
Where:
Qτ = (R) tan d
tan d = Coefficient of friction between the footing base and the soil
tan d = tan f for cast-in-place concrete against soil
tan d = (0.8)tan f for precast concrete
R = Vertical force – Minimum Strength and Extreme Event factors are used to
calculate R
f = angle of internal friction for soil
D. Overturning Stability
Calculate the locations of the overturning reaction (R) for strength and extreme
event limit states. Minimum load factors are applied to forces and moments resisting
overturning. Maximum load factors are applied to forces and moments causing
overturning. Note that for footings subjected to biaxial loading, the following
eccentricity requirements apply in both directions.
See AASHTO LRFD Sections 11.6.3.3 (Strength Limit State) and 11.6.5 (Extreme
Event Limit State) for the appropriate requirements for the location of the overturning
reaction (R).
E. Footing Settlement
The service limit state bearing resistance (qser) will be a settlement-limited value,
typically 1″.
Bearing Stress = sser < fqser = Factored nominal bearing
Where, qser is the unfactored service limit state bearing resistance and f is the service
resistance factor. In general, the resistance factor (f) shall be equal to 1.0.
For immediate settlement (not time dependent), both permanent dead load and live
load should be considered for sizing footings for the service limit state. For long-term
settlement (on clays), only the permanent dead loads should be considered.
If the structural analysis yields a bearing stress (sser) greater than the bearing
resistance, then the footing must be re-evaluated. The first step would be to increase
the footing size to meet bearing resistance. If this leads to a solution, recheck
layout criteria and inform the Geotechnical Engineer the footing size has increased.
If the footing size cannot be increased, consult the Geotechnical Engineer for
other solutions.

July 2019
F. Concrete Design
Footing design shall be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.13.3 for footings
and the general concrete design of AASHTO LRFD Chapter 5. The following Figure
7.7.4-4 illustrates the modes of failure checked in the footing concrete design.
Figure 7.7.4-4 Spread Footing Modes of Failure
  

1. Footing Thickness and Shear
The minimum footing thickness shall be 1′-0″. The minimum plan dimension
shall be 4′-0″. Footing thickness may be governed by the development
length of the column dowels, or by concrete shear requirements (with or
without reinforcement). If concrete shear governs the thickness, it is the
engineer’s judgment, based on economics, as to whether to use a thick footing
unreinforced for shear or a thinner footing with shear reinforcement. Generally,
shear reinforcement should be avoided but not at excessive cost in concrete,
excavation, and shoring requirements. Where stirrups are required, place the
first stirrup at d/2 from the face of the column or pedestal. For large footings,
consider discontinuing the stirrups at the point where vu = vc.
2. Footing Force Distribution
The maximum internal forces in the footing shall be determined based on a
triangular or trapezoidal bearing pressure distribution, see AASHTO LRFD
Section 10.6.5.
3. Vertical Reinforcement (Column or Wall)
Vertical reinforcement shall be developed into the footing to adequately transfer
loads to the footing. Vertical rebar shall be bent 90° and extend to the top of the
bottom mat of footing reinforcement. This facilitates placement and minimizes
footing thickness. Bars in tension shall be developed using 1.25 Ld. Bars in
compression shall develop a length of 1.25 Ld, prior to the bend. Where bars are
not fully stressed, lengths may be reduced in proportion, but shall not be less
than ¾ Ld.
The concrete strength used to compute development length of the bar in the
footing shall be the strength of the concrete in the footing. The concrete strength
to be used to compute the section strength at the interface between footing and
a column concrete shall be that of the column concrete. This is allowed because
of the confinement effect of the wider footing.
4. Bottom Reinforcement
Concrete design shall be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD. Reinforcement shall
not be less than #6 bars at 12″ centers to account for uneven soil conditions and
shrinkage stresses.

July 2019
5. Top Reinforcement
Top reinforcement shall be used in any case where tension forces in the top of
the footing are developed. Where columns and bearing walls are connected
to the superstructure, sufficient reinforcement shall be provided in the tops
of footings to carry the weight of the footing and overburden assuming zero
pressure under the footing. This is the uplift earthquake condition described
under “Superstructure Loads.” This assumes that the strength of the connection
to the superstructure will carry such load. Where the connection to the
superstructure will not support the weight of the substructure and overburden,
the strength of the connection may be used as the limiting value for determining
top reinforcement. For these conditions, the AASHTO LRFD requirement for
minimum percentage of reinforcement will be waived. Regardless of whether
or not the columns and bearing walls are connected to the superstructure, a mat
of reinforcement shall normally be provided at the tops of footings. On short
stub abutment walls (4′ from girder seat to top of footing), these bars may be
omitted. In this case, any tension at the top of the footing, due to the weight of
the small overburden, must be taken by the concrete in tension.
Top reinforcement for column or wall footings designed for two-way action shall
not be less than #6 bars at 12″ centers, in each direction while top reinforcement
for bearing wall footings designed for one-way action shall not be less than #5
bars at 12″ centers in each direction.
6. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement
For footings greater than 3 feet thick, temperature and shrinkage reinforcing shall
be provided on the side faces in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.10.8.
7.7.5 Pile-Supported Footing Design

The minimum footing thickness shall be 2′-0″. The minimum plan dimension shall be 4′-
0″. Footing thickness may be governed by the development length of the column dowels,
or by concrete shear requirements. The use of strut and tie modeling is recommended for
the design of all pile caps and pile footings. Figure 7.7.5-1 identifies the modes of failure
that should be investigated for general pile cap/footing design.
Figure 7.7.5-1 Pile Footing Modes of Failure
 
 


 
 
July 2019
A. Pile Embedment, Clearance, and Rebar Mat Location

All piles shall have an embedment in the concrete sufficient to resist moment, shear,
and axial loads. The steel casing for cast-in-place concrete piles with reinforcing
extending into footings shall be embedded a minimum of 6″. The clearance for the
bottom mat of footing reinforcement shall be 1½″ between the reinforcing and
the top of the casing for CIP pile footings. See Figure 7.7.5-2 for the minimum pile
clearance to the edge of footing.
Figure 7.7.5-2 Pile Embedment and Reinforcing Placement
 














 
B. Concrete Design
In determining the proportion of pile load to be used for calculation of shear stress
on the footing, any pile with its center 6″ or more outside the critical section shall
be taken as fully acting on that section. Any pile with its center 6″ or more inside
the critical section shall be taken as not acting for that section. For locations in
between, the pile load acting shall be proportioned between these two extremes.
The critical section shall be taken as the effective shear depth (dv) as defined in
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.2.9. The distance from the column/wall face to the
allowable construction centerline of pile (design location plus or minus the tolerance)
shall be used to determine the design moment of the footing. The strut and tie design
method should be used where appropriate.

July 2019
7.8 Shafts
7.8.1 Axial Resistance
The factored axial resistance of the shaft (R) is generally composed of two parts: the
nominal end bearing (Rp) and the nominal skin friction (Rs). The general formula is as
follows, where φ is the limit state resistance factor.
R = jp Rp + js Rs (7.8.1-1)
The total factored shaft loading must be less than the factored axial resistance. Rp and Rs
are treated as independent quantities although research has shown that the end bearing
and skin friction resistance have some interdependence. Rp and Rs shown as a function of
depth will be stated in the geotechnical report for the bridge. End bearing resistance, Rp,
is typically provided by the Geotechnical Branch as a net value. Thus, the effective weight
of the shaft can be reduced by the total weight of the excavated soil when examining
compressive loads and resistances.
The designer shall consider all applicable factored load combination limit states and shaft
resistances when determining shaft axial resistance and demand and shaft tip elevations.
For some shaft designs, liquefiable soils, scour conditions and/or downdrag forces may
need to be considered. Determining which limit states to include these conditions or
forces can be complex. The Hydraulics Branch and the Geotechnical Engineer shall be
consulted to ensure overly and/or under conservative load combinations and resistances
are not being considered. Open and frequent communication is essential during design.
Although the AASHTO LRFD include water loads, WA, in Extreme Event I limit states,
in most cases the loss of soil resistance due to scour conditions is not combined with
Extreme Event I load combinations. The probability of a design earthquake occurring
in the presence of the maximum scour event is low. However, in some instances it is
appropriate to include some scour effects. When scour is included with Extreme Event I
load combinations, the skin resistance of the soil, up to a maximum of 25 percent of the
scour depth for the design flood (l00 year event), shall be deducted from the resistance
of the shaft. The loss of skin resistance for the full scour depth for the design flood shall
be considered when checking axial resistance of the shaft for all strength and service limit
states. The loss of skin resistance for the full scour depth of the check flood (500 year
event) shall be considered when checking the axial resistance of the shaft for Extreme
Event II limit states. It should be noted that scour does not produce a load effect on the
structure but changes the geometry of the bridge pier and available soil resistance so that
effects of other loads are amplified. The engineer may also need to consider scour effects
on piers that are currently outside of the ordinary high water zones due to potential
migration of rivers or streams during flood events. The Hydraulics Branch will provide
guidance for these rare cases.
Downdrag forces may also need to be considered in some designs. Downdrag forces are
most often caused by the placement of fill adjacent to shafts, which causes consolidation
and settlement of underlying soils. This situation is applicable to service and strength
limit states. Downdrag forces can also be caused by liquefaction-induced settlement
caused by a seismic event. Pore water pressure builds up in liquefiable soils during
ground shaking. And as pore water pressure dissipates, the soil layer(s) may settle, causing
downdrag forces on the shaft to develop. These liquefaction induced downdrag forces
are only considered in the Extreme Event I limit state. However, downdrag induced
by consolidation settlement is never combined with downdrag forces induced by
liquefaction, but are only considered separately in their applicable limit states.
July 2019
The downdrag is treated as a load applied to the shaft foundations. The settling soil,
whether it is caused by consolidation under soil stresses (caused, for example, by the
placement of fill), or caused by liquefaction, creates a downward acting shear force
on the foundations. This shear force is essentially the skin friction acting on the shaft,
but reversed in direction by the settlement. This means that the skin friction along the
length of the shaft within the zone of soil that is contributing to downdrag is no longer
available for resisting downward axial forces and must not be included with the soil
resistance available to resist the total downward axial (i.e., compression) loads acting on
the foundation.
In general, the Geotechnical Engineer will provide shaft soil resistance plots as a
function of depth that includes skin friction along the full length of the shaft. Therefore,
when using those plots to estimate the shaft foundation depth required to resist the
axial compressive foundation loads, this “skin friction lost” due to downdrag must be
subtracted from the resistance indicated in the geotechnical shaft resistance plots, and
the downdrag load per shaft must be added to the other axial compression loads acting
on the shaft.
Similarly, if scour is an issue that must be considered in the design of the foundation,
with regard to axial resistance (both in compression and in uplift), the skin friction lost
due to removal of the soil within the scour depth must be subtracted from the shaft
axial resistance plots provided by the Geotechnical Engineer. If there is any doubt as to
whether or not this skin friction lost must be subtracted from the shaft resistance plots,
it is important to contact the Geotechnical Engineer for clarification on this issue. Note
that if both scour and downdrag forces must be considered, it is likely that the downdrag
forces will be reduced by the scour. This needs to be considered when considering
combination of these two conditions, and assistance from the Geotechnical Engineer
should be obtained.
The Geotechnical Design Manual Chapters 6, 8, and 23, should be consulted for additional
explanation regarding these issues.
Following is a summary of potential load combination limit states that shall be checked
if scour effects, liquefiable soils and/or downdrag forces are included in the design. The
geotechnical report will provide the appropriate resistance factors to use with each limit
state.
A. Embankment Consolidation Downdrag
Embankment downdrag from fill or the presence of compressible material below the
foundations; no liquefaction.
Checks:
1. Include embankment induced downdrag loads with all Strength and Service
Limit States. Do not include with Extreme Limit States. Use maximum load factor
unless checking an uplift case, where the minimum shall be used. Subtract the
skin friction lost within the downdrag zone from the shaft axial resistance plots
provided by the Geotechnical Engineer.

July 2019
B. Seismic Liquefaction Downdrag

Liquefiable soils with post-earthquake downdrag forces. No embankment downdrag.
If embankment downdrag is present, it shall not be included with liquefaction-
induced downdrag therefore it would not be included in Check 3 below.
Checks:
1. Extreme Event I Limit State
Use static soil resistances (no loss of resistance due to liquefaction) and no
downdrag forces. Use a live load factor of 0.5.
Use reduced soil resistance due to liquefaction and no downdrag forces. Use a
live load factor of 0.5. The soils in the liquefied zone will not provide the static
skin friction resistance but will in most cases have a reduced resistance that will
be provided by the Geotechnical Engineer.
Post liquefaction. Include downdrag forces, a live load factor of 0.5 and a
reduced post-liquefaction soil resistance provided by the Geotechnical Engineer.
Do not include seismic inertia forces from the structure since it is a post-
earthquake check. There will be no skin resistance in the post-earthquake
liquefied zone. Therefore, subtract the skin friction lost within the downdrag
zone from the shaft axial resistance plots provided by the Geotechnical Engineer.
C. Scour
Scour from design flood (100 year events) and check floods (500 year events.) The
shaft shall be designed so that shaft penetration below the scour of the applicable
flood event provides enough axial resistance to satisfy demands. Since in general the
Geotechnical Engineer will provide shaft resistance plots that include the skin friction
within the scour zone, the skin friction lost will need to be subtracted from the axial
resistance plots provided to determine the shaft resistance acting below the scour
depth. A special case would include scour with Extreme Event I limit states without
liquefiable soils and downdrag. It is overly conservative to include liquefied soil
induced downdrag and scour with the Extreme Event I limit states. The Hydraulics
Branch and the Geotechnical Engineer will need to be consulted for this special case.
Checks:
1. Service and Strength Limit States
Subtract the skin friction lost within the scour depth (i.e., 100 percent of the
scour depth for the 100 year design flood) from the shaft axial resistance plots
provided by the Geotechnical Engineer, to estimate the shaft depth required to
resist all service and strength limit demands.

July 2019
2. Extreme Event II Limit State

Subtract the skin friction lost within the scour depth (i.e., 100 percent of the
scour depth for the 500 year check flood event) from the shaft axial resistance
plots provided by the Geotechnical Engineer, to estimate the shaft depth
required to resist all Extreme Event II limit demands. Use a live load factor of
0.5. Do not include ice load, IC, vessel collision force, CV, and vehicular collision
force, CT.
3. Extreme Event II Limit State
Subtract the skin friction lost within the scour depth (in this case only 50 percent
of the scour depth for the 500 year check flood event) from the shaft axial
resistance plots provided by the Geotechnical Engineer, to estimate the shaft
depth required to resist all Extreme Event II limit demands. Use a live load factor
of 0.5. In this case, include ice load, IC, vessel collision force, CV, and vehicular
collision force, CT.
4. Extreme Event I Limit State (special case - no liquefaction)
Subtract the skin friction lost within the scour depth (i.e., in this case 25 percent
of the scour depth for the 100 year design flood) from the shaft axial resistance
plots provided by the Geotechnical Engineer, to estimate the shaft depth
required to resist the Extreme Event I limit state demands.
D. Axial Resistance Group Reduction Factors
The group reduction factors for axial resistance of shafts for the strength and
extreme event limit states shall be taken as shown in Table 7.8.1-1 unless otherwise
specified by the Geotechnical Engineer. These reduction factors presume that good
shaft installation practices are used to minimize or eliminate the relaxation of the soil
between shafts and caving. If this cannot be adequately controlled due to difficult
soils conditions or for other constructability reasons, lower group reduction factors
shall be used as recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer of record. Alternatively,
steps could be required during and/or after shaft construction to restore the soil to
its original condition. The Geotechnical Engineer will provide these recommendations,
which could include but is not limited to, pressure grouting of the tip, grouting along
side of the shaft or full length casing.

July 2019
Table 7.8.1-1 Group Reduction Factors for Axial Resistance of Shafts

Shaft Center- Group
Shaft Group to-Center Reduction
Soil Type Configuration Spacing Special Conditions factor, η
Cohesionless Single row 2D 0.90
(Sands, gravels, etc.) 2.5D 0.95
3D or more 1.0
Multiple row 2.5D* 0.67
3D 0.80
4D or more 1.0
Single and 2D or more Shaft group cap in intimate 1.0
multiple rows contact with ground
consisting of medium-dense
or denser soil
Single and 2D or more Full depth casing is used and 1.0
multiple rows augering ahead of the casing
is not allowed, or pressure
grouting is used along the
shaft sides to restore lateral
stress losses caused by shaft
installation, and the shaft tip
is pressure grouted
Cohesive Single or 2D or more 1.0
(Clays, clayey sands, multiple rows
and glacially overridden,
well-graded soils such
as glacial till)
*Minimum spacing for multiple row configurations.
These group reduction factors apply to both strength and extreme event limit states. For
the service limit state the influence of the group on settlement as shall be determined
from the AASHTO LRFD and the Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.
7.8.2 Structural Design and Detailing

Standard Specifications Section 6-19 should be reviewed as part of the design of shafts.
The structural design of shafts is similar to column design. The following guidelines shall
be followed:
A. For shaft foundation supporting columns in any SDC C or D, the shaft nominal
moment capacity shall be designed to resist 1.25 times the moment demand
generated in the shaft by the overstrength column plastic hinge moment at the base
of the column.
B. Concrete Class 5000P shall be specified for the entire length of the shaft for wet or
dry conditions of placement.
C. When shafts are constructed in water, the concrete specified for the casing shoring
seal shall be Class 4000W.

July 2019
D. The assumed concrete compressive strength may be taken as ƒ′c for structural design
of shafts. For seismic design, the expected compressive strength may be increased by
1.3 in accordance with AASHTO Seismic Section 8.4.4.
E. The presence of permanent steel casing shall be taken into account in the shaft
design (i.e. for stiffness, and etc.), but the structural resistance of permanent steel
casing shall not be considered for structural design of shafts unless the design
conforms to Section 7.10.
F. Cover requirements vary depending on the shaft diameter and shall be as
specified below:
• Diameter less than or equal to 3′-0″ = 3″
• Diameter greater than 3′-0″ and less than 5′-0″ = 4″
• Diameter greater than or equal to 5′-0″ = 6″
Standard Specifications Section 6-19 lists exceptions to these cover requirements
when permanent slip casings are used in column splice zones.
G. In general, shaft reinforcing shall be detailed to minimize congestion, facilitate
concrete placement by tremie, and maximize consolidation of concrete.
H. The clear spacing between spirals and hoops shall not be less than 6″ or more than
9″, with the following exception. The clear spacing between spirals or hoops may
be reduced in the splice zone in single column/single shaft connections because
shaft concrete may be vibrated in this area, negating the need for larger openings
to facilitate good flow of concrete through the reinforcing cage.
I. The volumetric ratio and spacing requirements of the AASHTO Seismic Specifications
for confinement need not be met. The top of shafts in typical WSDOT single column/
single shaft connections remains elastic under seismic loads due to the larger shaft
diameter (as compared to the column). Therefore this requirement does not need to
be met.
J. Shaft transverse reinforcement may be constructed as hoops or spirals. Spiral
reinforcement is preferred for shaft transverse reinforcement. However, if #6 spirals
at 6″ (excluding the exception in 7.8.2.H) clear do not satisfy the shear design,
circular hoops may be used. Circular hoops in shafts up to #9 bars may be lap spliced
using a welded lap detail. Note: Welded lap splices for spirals are currently acceptable
under the AWS D1.4 up to bar size #6. Recent testing has been performed by
WSDOT for bar sizes #7 through #9. All tests achieved full tensile capacity (including
125 percent of yield strength.) Therefore, #7 through #9 welded lap spliced hoops
are acceptable to use provided they are not located in possible plastic hinge regions.
Circular hoops may also be fabricated using a manual direct butt weld, resistance butt
weld, or mechanical coupler. Weld splicing of hoops for shafts shall be completed
prior to assembly of the shaft steel reinforcing cage. Refer to Section 7.3.5F for
additional discussion on circular hoops. Mechanical couplers may be considered
provided cover and clearance requirements are accounted for in the shaft details.
When welded hoops or mechanical couplers are used, the plans shall show a
staggered pattern around the perimeter of the shaft so that no two adjacent welded
splices or couplers are located at the same location.

July 2019
7 .4 .6-2 ��
� � � �
��

7 .4 .7-1 ��
K. In single column/single shaft configurations, the spacing of the shaft transverse
7 .7 .4-1
reinforcement in the �� shall
splice zone � � �meet
� � �the
��
requirements of the following
equation, which comes from the TRAC Report titled, “Noncontact Lap Splices in Bridge
7 .8 .1-1 � � ��
Column-Shaft Connections”:
��
7 .8 .2-1 �� (7.8.2-1)
��
Where:
Smax = Spacing7 .9 .2-1 ��
of transverse shaft��
reinforcement
Ash = Area of shaft spiral or transverse
��
reinforcement bar
fytr = 7-B-1 .1of shaft
Yield strength �� transverse reinforcement
�
ls = Standard splice length of the column reinforcement, per AASHTO LRFD.
��
Al = 7-B-1 .2
Total area �� column
of longitudinal �� reinforcement
�� 1�� 3
��
ful = Specified minimum tensile strength �
of column longitudinal reinforcement (ksi),
90 ksi for A615 and 80 ksi for �� A706 ��
7-B-1 .3 ��
= Factor representing the ratio
� �� tensile
� 1��reinforcement
��
�� of
k � column to total column �
��
�
reinforcement at the nominal resistance. In the upper half of the splice zone,
k = 1.0. In the lower half of
7-B-1 .4 �� the � splice� zone, this ratio could be determined
� � ��
from the column moment-curvature
� � �analysis using computer programs
XTRACT or CSiBridge. To simplify this process, k = 0.5 could safely be used in
��
7-B-1 .5A �11 �
most applications ��
∆
�
The additional lateral reinforcement� in the upper half of the oversized pile shafts
��
7-B-1 .5B
is required to control �33
cracking in �
this �∆ ��
region. The volumetric ratio of transverse
�
reinforcement throughout the splice zone shall not be less that provided by a #6
spiral with a 6″ pitch.
7-B-1 .6A ��
��
��
��
L. Longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided for the full length of shafts. The
��
minimum longitudinal reinforcement
7-B-1 .6B �� in the splice zone of single column/single shaft
��
��
connections shall be the larger of 0.75 percent Ag of the shaft or 1.0 percent Ag of
the attached column. The minimum
7-B-1 .7 �� 11longitudinal
� ∆� � �1� reinforcement beyond
� �� 1 � ∆� the splice
� ��
zone shall be 0.75 percent Ag of the shaft. The minimum longitudinal reinforcement
in shafts without single column/single
7-B-1 .8 �� 33 � shaft connections
∆� � �3� � �� shall
�� be 0.75
��3 � ∆�percent
� �� A� �g �of
the shaft.
��
7-B-1 .9 longitudinal
M. The clear spacing between �1� � ��
reinforcement shall not be less than 6″ or
��
more than 9″. If a shaft design is unable to meet this minimum requirement, a larger
diameter shaft shall be considered. Alternatively, Grade 80 reinforcing steel could
be considered. Where 3-bar bundles are used, the plans shall allow the contractor
to construct the cage with two of the three bars located towards the center of the
shaft. This allows the contractor flexibility in constructing the cage, but it reduces the
flexural resistance of the shaft.
N. Longitudinal reinforcing in shafts should be straight with no hooks to facilitate
concrete placement and removal of casing. If hooks are necessary to develop moment
at the top of a shaft (in a shaft cap situation) the hooks should be turned toward the
center of the shaft while leaving enough opening to allow concrete placement with
a tremie.
O. Locations of longitudinal splices shall be shown in the contract plans. Mechanical
splices shall be placed in low stress regions and staggered 2′-0″ minimum.
P. Use of two concentric circular rebar cages shall be avoided.

July 2019
Q. Resistance factors for Strength Limit States shall be per the latest AASHTO LRFD.
Resistance factors for Extreme Event Limit States shall be per the latest AASHTO
Seismic Specifications. The resistance factor for shear shall conform to the
AASHTO LRFD.
R. The axial load along the shaft varies due to the side friction. It is considered
conservative, however, to design the shaft for the full axial load plus the maximum
moment. The entire shaft normally is then reinforced for this axial load and moment.
S. Access tubes for Crosshole Sonic Log (CSL) testing or thermal wires for Thermal
Integrity Profiling (TIP) shall be provided in all shafts. One tube or wire shall be
furnished and installed for each foot of shaft diameter, rounded to the nearest
whole number, and shown in the plans. The number of access tubes or wires for
shaft diameters specified as “X feet 6 inches” shall be rounded up to the next higher
whole number. The access tubes shall be placed around the shaft, inside the spiral
or hoop reinforcement and three inches clear of the vertical reinforcement, at a
uniform spacing measured along the circle passing through the centers of the access
tubes. If the vertical reinforcement is not bundled and each bar is not more than one
inch in diameter, the access tubes shall be placed two inches clear of the vertical
reinforcement. If these minimums cannot be met due to close spacing of the vertical
reinforcement, then access tubes shall be bundled with the vertical reinforcement.
The thermal wires shall be placed around the shaft, inside the spiral or hoop
reinforcement and shall be tied to the vertical reinforcement.
T. Shafts shall be specified in English dimensions and shall be specified in sizes that do
not preclude any drilling method. Shafts shall be specified in whole foot increments
except as allowed here. The tolerances in Standard Specifications Section 6-19
accommodate metric casing sizes and/or oversized English casing sizes. Oversized
English casings are often used so that tooling for drilling the shafts, which are the
nominal English diameter, will fit inside the casing. There are a few exceptions, which
will be discussed below. See Table 7.8.2-1 for casing sizes and tolerances.

July 2019
Table 7.8.2-1 Shaft Casing Geometric Tolerances

Column A Column B Column C Column D Column E Column F Column G Column H
*Maximum *Maximum
Increase Decrease Maximum
Nominal (Outside) in Casing in Casing English
English Casing Inside Inside Casing Nominal (Outside)
Diameter Diameter Diameter Diameter Metric Casing Diameter
Feet Inches Inches Inches Inches Meters Feet Inches
12.0 144 6 0 150 3.73 12.24 146.85
11.0 132 6 0 138 3.43 11.25 135.0
10.0 120 6 2 126 3.00 9.84# 118.11
9.5 114 6 0 120 3.00 9.84 118.11
9.0 108 6 0 114 2.80 9.19 110.23
8.0 96 6 0 102 2.50 8.20 98.42
7.0 84 6 0 90 2.20 7.22 86.61
6.5 78 6 0 84 2.00 6.56 78.74
6.0 72 6 0 78 2.00 6.56 78.74
5.5 66 6 0 72
5.0 60 12 1 72 1.5 4.92# 59.05
4.5 54 12 0 66 1.50 4.92 59.05
4.0 ** 48 12 0 60 1.5 4.92 59.05
4.0** 48 12 1 60 1.2 3.94# 47.28
3.0 36 12 0 48 1.00 3.28 39.37
3.0 36 12 0 48 0.915 3.00 36.02
2.5 30 12 0 42
2.0 24 12 0 36 0.70 2.30 27.56
*Check Standard Specifications Section 6-19.

**Construction tolerances would allow either 1.2 or 1.5 meter casing to be used.
# Designer shall check that undersize shaft meets the design demands.
As seen in Table 7.8.2-1, construction tolerances shown in Column “C” allow shaft
diameters to be increased up to 12″ for shafts 5′-0″ diameter or less and increased
up to 6″ for shafts greater than 5′-0″ in diameter. In most cases these construction
tolerances allow either metric or English casings to be used for installation of
the shafts.
There are a few exceptions to these typical tolerances. These exceptions are
as follows:
1. 4.0′ Diameter Shafts
The tolerances in Columns “C” and “D” of Table 7.8.2-1 allow either an oversized
4.92′ diameter shaft or an undersized 3.94′ shaft to be constructed. The
reinforcement cage shall be sized to provide a minimum of 3″ of cover to the
undersized diameter.

July 2019

6.0′ diameter shaft or an undersized 4.92′ diameter shaft to be constructed.
The reinforcement cage shall be sized to provide a minimum of 4″ of cover to the
10.5′ diameter shaft or an undersized 9.84′ diameter shaft to be constructed.
The reinforcement cage shall be sized to provide a minimum of 4″ of cover to the
For all shaft diameters, the designer should bracket the design so that all possible
shaft diameters, when considering the construction tolerances, will satisfy the design
demands. The minimum shaft diameter (nominal or undersized) shall be used for
design of the flexural and shear reinforcement.
The nominal English shaft diameter shall be specified on the plans. When requesting
shaft resistance charts from the Geotechnical Engineer, the designer should request
charts for the nominal English shaft diameter.
U. Shafts supporting a single column shall be sized to allow for construction tolerances,
as illustrated in Figure 7.8.2-1.
Figure 7.8.2-1 Shaft to Column Construction Tolerances



 

 

 

 

 
 
 
The shaft diameter shall be based on the maximum column diameter allowed by the
following equation,
Maximum Column Diameter = Shaft Diameter – 2*(Shaft Concrete Cover) – 2*(Shaft
Horizontal Construction Tolerance) – 2*(Shaft Cage Thickness)
The shaft horizontal construction tolerance and shaft concrete cover shall conform to
Standard Specifications Section 6-19.

July 2019
If the column diameter used in design is larger than the maximum allowed for a given
shaft size, as defined by the equation above, a larger shaft diameter shall be used.
The shaft diameter specified here should not be confused with the desirable casing
shoring diameter discussed below.
V. Casing shoring shall be provided for all shafts below grade or waterline. However,
casing shoring requirements are different for shafts in shallow excavations and deep
excavations. Shafts in deep excavations require a larger diameter casing shoring to
allow access to the top of the shaft for column form placement and removal. The top
of shafts in shallow excavations (approximately 4′ or less) can be accessed from the
ground line above, by reaching in or by “glory-holing”, and therefore do not require
larger diameter casing shoring, see Figure 7.8.2-2. The designer shall locate the top
of in-water shafts above the water line when it simplifies construction. Where there
is a strong design benefit to lowering the top of in-water shafts, they may be located
below the groundline/mudline.
Figure 7.8.2-2 Shaft Casing Details







 



  







 











 



 
 
 
 

W. Changes in shaft diameters due to construction tolerances shall not result in a

reinforcing steel cage diameter different from the diameter shown in the plans (plan
shaft diameter minus concrete cover). For example, metric casing diameters used
in lieu of English casing diameters shall only result in an increase in concrete cover,
except as noted below for single column/single shaft connections requiring slip
casings. There are also exceptions for 4′-0″, 5′-0″, and 10′-0″ diameter shafts, see
Table 7.8.2-1.
X. Rotator and Oscillator drilling methods typically use a slip casing for permanent
casing in single column/single shaft connections, as shown in Figure 7.8.2-3.

July 2019
Figure 7.8.2-3 10'-0" Ø Shaft Constructed With The Oscillator Method


  
   

 
  

 





 
The use of the slip casing typically requires a modification to the reinforcing cage

diameter. This should be considered during the structural design of the shaft. The
slip casing also results in less concrete cover than the area of the shaft below the

slip casing. See Table 7.8.2-2 for expected reinforcing cage diameters and clear
cover. Shafts shall be designed such that the reduced concrete cover is acceptable
in this area because the casing is permanent. A minimum of 3″ of concrete cover
is achievable in this area for shafts 4′-0″diameter and larger and 1½″ of cover
for shafts less than 4′-0″. These concrete cover requirements shall be kept as a
minimum requirement. The reduction in strength (compared to the area below the
slip casing) associated with the reduced shaft diameter that results from the slip
casing is bounded within the shaft analysis and design methods prescribed here and
elsewhere. Therefore the reduction in strength in this area can be ignored.
Y. Reinforcing bar centralizers shall be detailed in the plans as shown in Figure 7.8.2-4.

July 2019
Table 7.8.2-2 Expected Reinforcing Cage Diameters and Clear Cover

Maximum (Outside) Inside Cage Cage
Nominal (Outside) Reinf. Cage Diameter Diameter Clearance Clearance
Metric Casing to Accommodate of Metric Nominal (Outside) Metric Slip Below Slip at Slip
Diameter Metric Casing1 Casing2 Casing Diameter3 Casing Casing4
Meters Feet Inches Feet Inches Inches Feet Meters Inches Inches
3.73 12.24 130.52 10.88 140.52 137.52 11.46 3.49 8.16 3.0
3.43 11.25 118.71 9.89 128.71 125.71 10.48 3.19 8.16 3.0
3.00 9.84 101.81 8.48 111.84 108.81 9.07 2.76 8.15 3.0
2.80 9.19 95.51 7.96 105.51 102.51 8.54 2.60 7.36 3.0
2.50 8.20 83.70 6.98 93.70 90.70 7.56 2.30 7.36 3.0
2.20 7.22 71.89 5.99 81.89 78.89 6.57 2.00 7.36 3.0
2.00 6.56 64.02 5.34 74.02 71.02 5.92 1.80 7.36 3.0
1.50 4.92 45.12 3.76 55.12 52.12 4.34 1.32 6.97 3.0
1.2 3.94 34.08 2.84 44.09 41.09 3.42 1.044 6.57 3.0
1.00 3.28 30.22 2.52 36.22 34.22 2.85 0.87 4.57 1.5
0.92 3.00 26.87 2.24 32.87 30.87 2.57 0.78 4.57 1.5
Notes:
1. Provided by Malcolm Drilling. Assumes minimum of 5″ clearance to inside of oscillator casing on 4′ and larger and uses 3″
of clearance on smaller than 4′ (1.2 meters).
2. Provided by Malcolm Drilling.
3. Provided by Malcolm Drilling. Slip casing is 3″ smaller than inside diameter of temporary casing from 1.2 meters to
3 meters. 1 meter on down is 2″ smaller in diameter.
4. Slip casing is typically ⅜″ to ½″ thick (provided by Malcolm Drilling). Cage clearance assumes ½″ thick casing.
Figure 7.8.2-4 Centralizer Detail

F
BAR ¼ x 3 (ASTM A36)

TIE TO HORIZ. 2
¼(Ä) TIE TO VERT. BARS
* SPIRAL WRAPS
¼(Ä) 2
SPIRAL REINF. (TYP.)
CENTRALIZER NOTES:
#4 (ASTM A706)
1. CENTRALIZERS SHALL BE EPOXY COATED
6 "S" MIN.
R = 1¾" OR PAINTED WITH INORGANIC ZINC AFTER

MIN. (TYP.) FABRICATION.
R = 2½" #4 2. EACH LEG SHALL BE TIED TO TWO

MIN. (TYP.) VERTICAL BAR BUNDLES AND TWO SPIRAL
WRAPS OR TWO HOOPS.
(TYP.)
"S"
3. SEE STD. SPEC. 6-19.3(5)B FOR SPACING

REQUIREMENTS.
BAR ¼ x 3
TIE TO VERT. BARS
VIEW F TIE TO HORIZ.

SPIRAL WRAPS
* MINIMUM CONCRETE
COVER MINUS ½"
Figure 7.8.2-5

July 2019
7.9 Piles and Piling

7.9.1 Pile Types
This section describes the piling used by the Bridge and Structures Office and their
applications. In general, piles should not be used where spread footings can be used.
However, where heavy scour conditions may occur, pile foundations should be considered
in lieu of spread footings. Also, where large amounts of excavation may be necessary
to place a spread footing, pile support may be more economical.
A. Cast-in-place Concrete Piles
Cast-in-place (CIP) concrete piles utilize driven steel pipe casings, which are then
filled with reinforcing steel and concrete. The bottom of the casing is typically capped
with a suitable flat plate for driving. However, the Geotechnical Branch may specify
special tips when difficult driving is expected.
The Geotechnical Branch will determine the minimum wall thickness of the steel pipe
casings based on driving conditions. However, the Standard Specifications require the
contractor to provide a wall thickness that will prevent damage during driving.
B. Structural Steel Pipe Piles
Structural steel pipe piles shall follow the current Special Provisions in addition to the
requirements in the Standard Specifications. Additionally, the design wall thickness
shall be reduced for corrosion over a 75-year minimum design life. Minimum
corrosion rates are specified in Section 7.10.2H.
C. Steel H Piles
Steel piles have been used where there are hard layers that must be penetrated in
order to reach an adequate point bearing stratum. Steel stress is generally limited to
9.0 ksi (working stress) on the tip. H piling can act efficiently as friction piling due
to its large surface area. Do not use steel H piling where the soil consists of only
moderately dense material. In such conditions, it may be difficult to develop the
friction capacity of the H piles and excessive pile length may result.
D. Timber Piles
Timber piles may be untreated or treated. Untreated piles are used only for temporary
applications or where the entire pile will be permanently below the water line. Where
composite piles are used, the splice must be located below the permanent water
table. If doubt exists as to the location of the permanent water table, treated timber
piles shall be used.
Where dense material exists, consideration should be given to allowing jetting (with
loss of uplift capacity), use of shoes, or use of other pile types.

July 2019
E. Steel Sheet Piles

Steel sheet piles are typically used for cofferdams and shoring and cribbing, but are
usually not made a part of permanent construction.
CIP concrete piles consisting of steel casing filled with reinforcing steel and concrete
are the preferred type of piling for WSDOT’s permanent bridges. Other pile types
such as precast, prestressed concrete piles, steel H piles, timber piles, and auger cast
piles shall not be used for WSDOT permanent bridge structures. These types of piles
may be used for temporary bridges and other non-bridge applications subject to
approval by the State Geotechnical Engineer and the State Bridge Design Engineer.
Micropiles shall not be used for new bridge foundations. This type of pile may be
used for foundation strengthening of existing bridges, temporary bridges and other
non-bridge applications subject to approval by the State Geotechnical Engineer and
the State Bridge Design Engineer.
Battered piles shall not be used for bridge foundations to resist lateral loads.
The above limitations apply to all WSDOT bridges including mega projects and
design-build contracts.
The above policy on pile types is the outcome of lengthy discussions and meetings
between the bridge design, construction and Geotechnical Engineers. These
limitations are to ensure improved durability, design and construction for WSDOT
pile foundations.
In seismic applications there is a need for bi-directional demands. Steel H piles have
proven to have little bending resistance for the purposes of resisting seismic load
while circular CIP piles provide consistent capacities in all directions. Also, CIP pile
casing is generally available in a full range of casing diameters. CIP piles are easily
inspected after driving to ensure the quality of the finished pile prior to placing
reinforcing steel and concrete.
Precast, prestressed concrete piles, and timber piles are difficult to splice and for
establishing moment connections into the pile cap.
Micropiles have little bending resistance for the purposes of resisting lateral loads in
seismic applications.

July 2019
��
Chapter 7 7 .4 .6-2 �� Substructure Design
� � �
��
7.9.2 Single Pile Axial Resistance

7 .4 .7-1 ��
The geotechnical report will provide the nominal axial resistance (Rn) and resistance factor
(f) for pile design.
7 .8 .1-1 � � ��The �� pile load (PU pile) must be less than the factored resistance,
�� factored
fRn, specified in the geotechnical report.
��
7 .8 .2-1
Pile �� (P
axial loading ) due to loads applied to a pile cap are determined as follows:
��
U pile
7 .9 .2-1 �� (7.9.2-1)
Where: ��
7-B-1 .1 ��
MU group = Factored � moment applied to the pile group. This includes eccentric LL, DC,
centrifugal
��
force (CE), etc. Generally, the dynamic load allowance
��
(IM) does
7-B-1 .2 ��
not apply.�� 1�� 3
��
�
C = Distance from the centroid of the pile group to the center of the pile under
consideration.
��
7-B-1 .3 �� 1��
Igroup = Moment�� of
�
�
�� inertia of the pile group �
N = Number of piles in the pile group
� � ��
PU pile group =
7-B-1 .4 ��Factored
� �axial �load to the pile group
� � �
DD = Downdrag force specified in the geotechnical report
γ = Load factor
��specified in the geotechnical report
7-B-1 .5A �11 � ��
∆�
Pile selfweight is typically neglected. As shown above, downdrag forces are treated as
load to the pile when designing for axial resistance. However, it should not be included in
��
7-B-1 .5B �33 � ��
the structural analysis�of the bridge.
�∆
See Section��
7-B-1 .6A 7.8.1
� “Axial Resistance”
�� of shafts for discussion on load combinations when
��
considering liquefaction,
�� scour and on downdrag effects. These guidelines are also
applicable to piles.��
7-B-1 .6B ��
��
7.9.3 Block Failure
7-B-1 .7
For �� 11
the strength and �extreme
∆� � �1� � ��
event limit�states,
� � ��1 � ∆�soil
if the � ��
is characterized as cohesive,
the pile group resistance shall also be checked for the potential for a “block” failure, as
7-B-1 .8 � � �33 � ∆� � �3� � �� 3 � ∆� � ��
described in�AASHTO LRFD Section 10.7.3.9. This check requires interaction between
the designer and the Geotechnical Engineer. The check is performed by the Geotechnical
��
7-B-1 .9 �1� � ��
Engineer based on loads
�� provided by the designer. If a block failure appears likely, the pile
group size shall be increased so that a block failure is prevented.
��
7-B-1 .10 �3� � ��
7.9.4 Pile Uplift ��
Piles may be designed for uplift if specified in the geotechnical report. In general,
pile construction methods that require preboring, jetting, or spudding will reduce
uplift capacity.
7.9.5 Pile Spacing

Pile spacing determination is typically determined collaboratively with the Geotechnical
Engineer. The Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 specifies a minimum center-to-center
spacing of 30″ or 2.5 pile diameters. However, center-to-center spacings of less than 2.5
pile diameters may be considered on a case-by-case basis.

July 2019
7.9.6 Structural Design and Detailing of CIP Concrete Piles

The structural design and detailing of CIP Concrete piles is similar to column design with
the following guidelines:
A. Concrete Class 5000P Concrete shall be specified for CIP concrete piles. The top 10′
of concrete in the pile is to be vibrated. Use 1.0 ƒ′c for the structural design.
B. For structural design, the reinforcement alone shall be designed to resist the total
moment throughout the length of pile without considering strength of the steel
casing. The minimum reinforcement shall be 0.75 percent Ag for SDC B, C, and D
and shall be provided for the full length of the pile unless approved by the WSDOT
Bridge Design Engineer. Minimum clearance between longitudinal bars shall meet the
requirements in Appendix 5.1-A2.
C. If the pile to footing/cap connection is not a plastic hinge zone longitudinal
reinforcement need only extend above the pile into the footing/cap a distance
equal to 1.0 ld (tension). If the pile to footing/cap connection is a plastic hinge zone
longitudinal reinforcement shall extend above the pile into the footing/cap a distance
equal to 1.25 ld.
D. Since the diameter of the concrete portion of the pile is dependent on the steel
casing thickness, the as-built diameter will not be known during design (since
the casing thickness is determined by the contractor). As such, a casing thickness
must be assumed for design. The structural engineer should work closely with the
Geotechnical Engineer to determine a suitable casing thickness to assume based
on expected driving conditions. A pile drivability analysis may be required for this.
Otherwise, the following can typically be assumed:
• ¼″ for piles less than 14″ in diameter
• ⅜″ for piles 14″ to 18″ in diameter
• ½″ for larger piles
E. Steel casing for 24″ diameter and smaller CIP piling should be designated by nominal
diameter rather than inside diameter. Standard Specifications Section 9-10.5 requires
steel casings to meet ASTM A252 Grade 2, which is purchased by nominal diameter
(outside diameter) and wall thickness. A pile thickness should not be stated in the
plans. As stated previously, the Standard Specifications require the contractor to
determine the pile casing thickness required for driving.
F. Transverse spiral reinforcement shall be designed to resist the maximum shear in the
pile. Avoid a spiral pitch of less than 3″. The minimum spiral shall be a #4 bar at 9″
pitch. If the pile to footing/cap connection is not a plastic hinge zone the volumetric
requirements of AASHTO LRFD Section 5.11.4.5 need not be met.
G. Resistance factors for Strength Limit States shall be per the latest AASHTO LRFD.
Resistance factors for Extreme Event Limit States shall be per the latest AASHTO
Seismic Specifications.

July 2019
H. Piles are typically assumed to be continuously supported. Normally, the soil

surrounding a foundation element provides sufficient bracing against a buckling
failure. Piles that are driven through very weak soils should be designed for reduced
lateral support, using information from the Geotechnical Branch as appropriate.
AASHTO LRFD 10.7.3.13.4 may be used to estimate the column length for buckling.
Piles driven through firm material normally can be considered fully supported for
column action (buckling not critical) below the ground.
I. The axial load along the pile varies due to side friction. It is considered conservative,
however, to design the pile for the full axial load plus the maximum moment. The
entire pile is then typically reinforced for this axial load and moment.
J. In all cases of uplift, the connection between the pile and the footing must be
carefully designed and detailed. The bond between the pile and the seal may be
considered as contributing to the uplift resistance. This bond value shall be limited
to 10 psi. The pile must be adequate to carry tension throughout its length. For
example, a timber pile with a splice sleeve could not be used.
7.9.7 Pile Splices

Pile splices shall be avoided where possible. If splices may be required in timber piling, a
splice shall be detailed on the plans. Splices between treated and untreated timber shall
always be located below the permanent water line.
7.9.8 Pile Lateral Design

The strength limit state for lateral resistance is only structural, though the determination
of pile fixity is the result of soil-structure interaction. A failure of the soil does not occur;
the soil will continue to displace at constant or slightly increasing resistance. Failure
occurs when the pile reaches the structural limit state and this limit state is reached,
in the general case, when the nominal combined bending, shear, and axial resistance is
reached.
Piles resist horizontal forces by a combination of internal strength and the passive
pressure resistance of the surrounding soil. The capacity of the pile to carry horizontal
loads should be investigated using a soil/structural analysis. For more information on
modeling individual piles or pile groups, see Section 7.2, Foundation Modeling and
Section 7.2.6 Lateral Analysis of Piles and Shafts.
7.9.9 Battered Piles

As stated previously, battered piles shall not be used to resist lateral loads for new
bridge foundations. Where battered piles are used, the maximum batter shall be 4½:12.
Piles with batters in excess of this become very difficult to drive and the bearing values
become difficult to predict. Ensure that battered piling do not intersect piling from
adjacent footings within the maximum length of the piles.

July 2019
7.9.10 Pile Tip Elevations and Quantities

Pile length quantities provided to PS&E are based on the minimum tip elevation given
in the geotechnical report or the expected depth required for axial design, whichever
is greater. If the minimum tip elevation given in the geotechnical report is greater than
the design tip elevation, overdriving the pile will be required. The Geotechnical Engineer
shall be contacted to evaluate driving conditions. A General Provision will be required
in the Special Provisions to alert the contractor of the additional effort needed to drive
these piles.
If a minimum tip elevation is required, it shall be shown in the contract plans. Minimum
pile tip elevations provided in the geotechnical report may need to be adjusted to lower
elevations depending on the results of the lateral, axial, and uplift analysis. If adjustment
in the minimum tip elevations is necessary, or if the pile diameter needed is different
than what was assumed for the geotechnical report, the Geotechnical Branch must be
informed so that pile drivability can be re-evaluated.
Note that lateral loading and uplift requirements may influence (possibly increase) the
number of piles required in the group if the capacity available at a reasonable minimum
tip elevation is not adequate. This will depend on the soil conditions and the loading
requirements. For example, if the upper soil is very soft or will liquefy, making the
minimum tip elevation deeper is unlikely to improve the lateral response of the piles
enough to be adequate. Adding more piles to the group or using a larger pile diameter to
increase the pile stiffness may be the only solution.
7.9.11 Plan Pile Resistance

The Bridge Plan General Notes shall list the Ultimate Bearing Capacity (Nominal Driving
Resistance, Rndr) in tons. This information is used by the contractor to determine the
pile casing thickness and size the hammer to drive the piles. The resistance for several
piers may be presented in a table as shown in Figure 7.9.11-1. If overdriving the piles is
required to reach the minimum tip elevation, the estimated amount of overdriving (tons)
shall be specified in the Special Provisions.
Figure 7.9.11-1 Pile Ultimate Bearing Capacity Table

THE PILES SHALL BE DRIVEN TO AN ULTIMATE BEARING
CAPACITY AS FOLLOWS:
PIER NO. ULTIMATE BEARING CAPACITY (TONS)
1 ====
4 ====
The total factored pile axial loading must be less than fRn for the pile design. Designers
should note that the driving resistance might be greater than the design loading for
liquefied soil conditions. This is not an overdriving condition. This is due to the resistance
liquefied soils being ignored for design, but included in the driving criteria to place
the piles.

July 2019
7.10 Concrete-Filled Steel Tubes

7.10.1 Scope
This section shall be taken to supersede AASHTO LRFD and AASHTO Seismic requirements
for concrete-filled steel tubes (or pipes). The use of concrete-filled steel tubes (CFST) and
reinforced concrete-filled steel tubes (RCFST) requires approval from the WSDOT Bridge
Design Engineer when used as a ductile element as part of an earthquake-resisting system.
CFST and RCFST have been shown to offer strength and stiffness beyond a conventional
reinforced concrete (RC) member. Recent research has shown that CFST members can
sustain large cyclic drifts with minimal damage. The design methods herein regarding
concrete-filled steel tubes are largely based on study, testing and recommendations
compiled by the University of Washington (UW).
The concrete for CFST members tested at the UW was a low-shrinkage, self-consolidating
concrete. The nominal concrete strengths were 6 ksi and 10 ksi. This represents structural
concrete with a minimum specified strength of 4 ksi, and an expected strength 25 percent
to 50 percent larger.
Prior CALTRANS and ARMY research programs studied fully restrained connections for
CFST pier to foundation connections. Two of those connections are further discussed in this
section and are shown in Figure 7.10.1-1. The first CFST-to-cap connection type involves
an annular ring attached to the top of the CFST, and is partially embedded into the pile cap.
This anchored connection resists flexural loading from the pile through strutting action to
the bottom of the pile cap (resulting from the portion of tube of the CFST that is in tension)
and the top of the pile cap (resulting from the portion of tube of the CFST column that in
compression). Tests show this connection is both simple to construct and fully effective in
transferring flexure. The current ACI procedure (ACI 318-2011) was recommended by the
UW as a conservative approach to design against punching shear in this type of connection.
The second CFST-to-cap connection type requires a circular reinforcing cage with headed
longitudinal bars that extend into the concrete cap. The CFST is discontinued just below the
cap. This connection type is beneficial for plastic design in that it allows the designer some
flexibility in the plastic demand that must be resisted by the cap. Refer to Section 7.10.4 for
ANNULAR RING
further discussion.
Transition connections between RC shafts and CFST shafts have not been tested, but
considerable analysis has been performed at the UW. Models have been developed
to predict the strength of RCFST members, and this RCFST behavior may be used to
provide increased strength over a significant length of the pile relative to conventional RC
construction. Overstrength factors for capacity protection design of adjacent members and
joint shear design at connections were not addressed in the research.
Figure 7.10.1-1 CFST Column-to-Cap Connections

ANNULAR RING HEADED BARS
Page 7-98 WSDOTCFST

Bridge Design
COLUMN-TO-CAP Manual M 23-50.19
CONNECTIONS
HEADED BARS FIGURE 7.10.1-1 July 2019

7.10.2 Design Requirements

A. Materials
1. The concrete for CFST and RCFST shall be class 5000P.
2. Steel tubes shall conform to one of the following:
i. API 5L Grade X42 or X52 for longitudinal seam welded or helical (spiral)
seam submerged-arc welded tube
ii. ASTM A 252 Grade 2 or 3 for longitudinal seam welded or helical (spiral)
seam submerged-arc welded tube
iii. ASTM A 572 or ASTM A 588 for longitudinal seam welded tube
3. When a CFST or RCFST will be used as an earthquake resisting element and is
expected to develop a plastic hinge, the steel tubes shall be fabricated from steel
meeting the mechanical and chemistry requirements of AASHTO M 270 GR 50
(ASTM A 709 GR 50) regardless of fabrication method.
4. For capacity protected members at the extreme event limit state, expected
material properties may be used to determine the expected nominal moment
capacity. The expected yield strength, Fye, for steel tubes shall be taken as 1.1Fy.
B. Limit States
For strength limit states, the resistance factors for axial load effects on CFST and
RCFST shall be taken per AASHTO LRFD for tension- and compression- controlled
reinforced concrete sections. The resistance factor for flexure shall be taken as 0.9.
The resistance factor for shear shall be taken as 0.85. For extreme event limit states,
resistance factors shall be taken as 1.0.
C. General Dimensions
The minimum tube wall thickness shall not be taken less than ⅜ inch at the time
of installation. To develop the full plastic capacity of CFST or RCFST members, it is
necessary to ensure that local buckling does not occur prior to development of the
strength of the tube. Therefore the following D/t limits are recommended:
1. For members subjected to elastic forces:
𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸
≤ 0.22 (7.10.2-1) (7.10.2-1)
𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸
𝐷𝐷 ≤ 0.22 𝐸𝐸 (7.10.2-1)
2. For members subjected to plastic
𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡
forces::
≤ 0.15 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
(7.10.2-2)
𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸
≤ 0.15 (7.10.2-2) (7.10.2-2)
𝑡𝑡 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝐸𝐸
𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼 𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠𝑦𝑦𝐼𝐼𝑆𝑆 + 𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝑐𝑐 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-3)
Where D is the outside diameter 𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼
of the
𝐶𝐶 ′ 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
= 0.15=tube
𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠+
𝐼𝐼𝑆𝑆(in.),
++
𝑃𝑃 𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸
and 𝑐𝑐 𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠𝑐𝑐t is
𝐴𝐴
≤ the (7.10.2-3)
0.9 wall thickness of the
(7.10.2-4)
𝑃𝑃0 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 +𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐
tube (in.). Both D and t shall be adjusted for corrosion
𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 as defined in Section H.
𝐶𝐶 ′ = 0.15 +𝜋𝜋 + 𝐴𝐴 +𝐴𝐴 ≤ 0.9 (7.10.2-4)
𝑃𝑃0
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) = �� − 𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 2 − 𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟 𝐹𝐹
𝑐𝑐 𝑚𝑚 𝑦𝑦
2
𝜋𝜋
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) = �� − 𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 2 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ′
𝑐𝑐 3 ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦2
2 2 2
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) = �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 − 𝑦𝑦 ) − 3 � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑚𝑚 𝑟𝑟
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
𝑖𝑖
𝑐𝑐 3 𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 2
𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛=(𝑦𝑦)
𝑀𝑀 = �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 2 − 𝑦𝑦 2 ) −
𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3
�∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′
𝑐𝑐 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
(7.10.2-7) 𝐹𝐹
𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦
𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃 = −1 𝑦𝑦 (7.10.2-7)
= 𝑟𝑟𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐( )
𝑟𝑟
(7.10.2-8)
𝑚𝑚
𝑦𝑦
𝜃𝜃 = 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠−1𝑡𝑡(𝑟𝑟 ) (7.10.2-8)
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 = 𝑟𝑟 − 2 𝑚𝑚 (7.10.2-9)
𝑡𝑡
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 = 𝑟𝑟 − 2 𝜋𝜋 (7.10.2-9)
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) = �� 2 − 𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 2 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ 𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 −𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 �4𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + (
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 𝜋𝜋
Page 7-99
July 2019 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) = �� 2 − 𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 2 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ′
𝑐𝑐 3 ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦2−𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 �4𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 +
(
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) = �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 2 − 𝑦𝑦 2 ) − 3 � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ 𝑐𝑐 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑚𝑚 𝑟𝑟
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 + 4𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑖𝑖
7.8.1-1 𝑅𝑅 = 𝜑𝜑" 𝑅𝑅" + 𝜑𝜑, 𝑅𝑅,
D. Stiffness
𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸 𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸
The effective stiffness, 𝑡𝑡EI≤ , ≤
0.22
of 0.22
circular CFST, as defined (7.10.2-1)
(7.10.2-1)
in Equation 7.10.2-3, shall
𝑡𝑡
eff 𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
be used to evaluate deflections,
𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷
deformations,
𝐸𝐸vw_𝐸𝐸 3 $
buckling resistance, and moment
magnification. The effective ≤ ≤
0.15 0.15 (7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2)
𝑡𝑡 stiffness
=𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 factor, C’, is defined in Equation 7.10.2-4.
ki Wbx k
7.8.2-1 𝑡𝑡 𝑆𝑆\]^ y_h 3Kh
𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝐸𝐸=
𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝐼𝑆𝑆𝐸𝐸+
𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝐼𝑆𝑆𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸
+ 𝑐𝑐𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸
𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3) (7.10.2-3)
′ 𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠
= 0.15
𝐶𝐶 ′ =𝐶𝐶 0.15 + ++𝑃𝑃 +𝑠𝑠𝐴𝐴 +𝐴𝐴 (7.10.2-4)
≤ 0.9(7.10.2-4)
≤ 0.9 (7.10.2-4)
𝑃𝑃0 0𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 +𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐
7.9.2-1 0𝑃𝑃z "#$% 4 = 0𝑃𝑃𝜋𝜋z "#$% '1Y6" 4/𝑁𝑁 + 𝑀𝑀z '1Y6" 𝐶𝐶/𝐼𝐼'1Y6" + 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾
P0 is the nominal compressive 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦)
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) =𝜋𝜋��
=resistance
�� −𝑟𝑟𝜃𝜃�
− 2𝜃𝜃� 𝑖𝑖
2 𝑟𝑟 2 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
(crushing
− 𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ load) without
∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓
0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ ′
moment
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 as defined
𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟
𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟 𝑚𝑚 (7.10.2-
(7.10.2-5)
2
in Equation 7.10.2-5, P is the factored axial load effect, 3
and A s is the combined
2
area
𝑐𝑐 3 𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 2 𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚
of the steel tube and steel reinforcing.
𝑀𝑀
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) 𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦)
= �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟
2
𝑖𝑖 −𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦−)𝑦𝑦− −
= �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟
2 2 2 ) � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓
� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓
′ ′
+ 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (7.10.2-
(7.10.2-6)
𝑐𝑐 + 𝑐𝑐4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3 3 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖
Ö
7.10.2-5 𝑃𝑃 = 0.95𝑓𝑓 X 𝐴𝐴X + 𝐹𝐹á,,â 𝐴𝐴,â (7.10.2-7) (7.10.2-5)
𝑐𝑐 =Å𝑐𝑐𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖= 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-7)
𝑦𝑦
Ast is the area of the steel tube.
𝜃𝜃 =𝜃𝜃 = −1
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑦𝑦
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠( −1 )( ) (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8)
𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚
E. Flexure and Axial Resistance 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟=−𝑟𝑟 − 2
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 = (7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9)
2
The flexural strength of CFST and RCFST members may be determined using the
𝜋𝜋
plastic stress distribution method
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦)
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) = �� =𝜋𝜋(PSDM).
��
− 𝜃𝜃� 𝑖𝑖 The
−𝑟𝑟𝜃𝜃� 2 𝑟𝑟 2 − appropriate
−𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ limit
∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ state
𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟
𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟 𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑚𝑚
−𝑡𝑡stresses
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏−𝑡𝑡 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏and
𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟�4𝜃𝜃 �4𝜃𝜃
𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹
+𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝜋𝜋+− (𝜋𝜋2𝜃𝜃
−𝑏𝑏2𝜃𝜃
)0
2 2
geometry is shown in Figure 7.10.2-1. 3 2
3 𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 2 𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚
𝑀𝑀 (𝑦𝑦) = 2 2−
�𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 2 )𝑦𝑦 2 )𝑐𝑐 − 𝑐𝑐 � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′
+ 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Substructure Design
𝑀𝑀 (𝑦𝑦) = �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟
Solutions for the interaction diagrams can be developed
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 𝑖𝑖 −𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦 − 3 3
� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′
using
𝑐𝑐 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐parametric
𝑟𝑟
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
𝑟𝑟
+𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦equations
4𝑡𝑡+ 4𝑡𝑡
Chapter
𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑏𝑏 7 𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹 − 0.95
−𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦0.95𝑓𝑓 ′
𝑐𝑐
𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖
for P(y) and M(y) where y is𝑐𝑐 the 𝑟𝑟distance from the centroid to the neutral axis.
(7.10.2-12)
𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏 =𝑏𝑏𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏=𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃
𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃
𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2-12)
A positive
Stress value oftoP be
is assumed is aplastically
net compressive developed force. M and
over y are positive
the following withofthe sign
regions
𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦
convention shown in 𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏 =
Figure = −1
𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠( −1
7.10.2-1. y (7.10.2-13)
()The) parameter (7.10.2-13)
varies between plus and minus
the section: 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
ri, where ri is the radius of the𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴concrete 𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴 core.
Acc = area of concrete = 𝑏𝑏2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏 in compression (7.10.2-14)
𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏 =𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏effective (7.10.2-14)
Stress is assumed to be plastically
2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
Asc = area of the steel tube in compression developed over the following regions of
the section:
A = area of the steel 𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉
=
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛tube𝑉𝑉= +𝑉𝑉 +
0.5𝑉𝑉
𝑠𝑠 in𝑠𝑠 tension 0.5𝑉𝑉
𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-15)
(7.10.2-15)
st
Abc = area of the internal steel
1.47𝐹𝐹 1.47𝐹𝐹 reinforcing in compression
𝑢𝑢 𝑡𝑡 𝑢𝑢 𝑡𝑡
𝑤𝑤 ≥𝑤𝑤 ≥steel
= area of thePlastic
internal reinforcing in Method
tension
(7.10.3-1)
(7.10.3-1)
Abt7.10.2-1
Figure Stress
𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒Distribution
𝐷𝐷 2 𝐷𝐷 2
𝑜𝑜 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹 𝑢𝑢 𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹 𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜
𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒 ≥𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒�≥4𝑜𝑜�+4 + 𝑢𝑢 −′ 2𝑜𝑜− (7.10.3-2)
(7.10.3-2)
2
6 𝑓𝑓′6�𝑓𝑓 � 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝐷𝐷 250𝐶𝐶 2 𝐷𝐷 2
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝐷𝐷 250𝐶𝐶 𝐷𝐷
ℎ =ℎ�= �+4 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − −2 (7.10.3-3)
(7.10.3-3)
�𝑓𝑓′
4 �𝑓𝑓′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝐶𝐶=
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝐶𝐶+
𝑐𝑐 + 𝑠𝑠 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 (7.10.3-4)
(7.10.3-4)
𝑑𝑑𝑓𝑓ℎ≥+ℎ𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒+ 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒
𝑑𝑑𝑓𝑓 ≥ (7.10.3-5)
(7.10.3-5)
𝐷𝐷
𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒𝐷𝐷≥
𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒 ≥ 𝑜𝑜 𝑜𝑜
+ 1.75𝑙𝑙
+ 1.75𝑙𝑙 𝑒𝑒 𝑒𝑒 (7.10.
(7.10. 3-6)3-6)
2 2
Where 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒
≤𝑠𝑠2.5
≤ 2.5
𝑠𝑠Plastic (7.10.3-7)
(7.10.3-7)
Stress Distribution Method
Acc = area of concrete effective in compression
Figure 7.10.2-1
Asc = area of the steel tube in compression
Alternatively,
Ast a strain-compatibility
= area analysis can be performed with appropriate
of the steel tube in tension
plastic stress-strain relationships.
Abc = area of the internal steel reinforcing in compression
A bt
1. CFT = area of the–internal
Interaction steel reinforcing
A parametric solutioninfor
tension
the nominal interaction
diagram can
Alternatively, be developed usinganalysis
a strain-compatibility Figure 7.10.2-2 and Equations
can be performed 7.10.2-5
with appropriate
through 7.10.2-9. Figure 7.10.2-2b
plastic stress-strain relationships. also shows normalized interaction curves
for various D/t ratios.

July 2019
Plastic Stress Distribution Method
7.7.4-1 𝑄𝑄q = 𝜙𝜙 s 𝑄𝑄s + 𝜙𝜙Figure
%" 𝑄𝑄%" 7.10.2-1
Alternatively, a strain-compatibility analysis can be performed with appropriate
plastic stress-strain relationships.
1. CFST Interaction – A parametric solution for the nominal interaction diagram can
CFT using
1. 7.8.1-1
be developed Interaction
𝑅𝑅 =–7.10.2-2
Figure A parametric
𝜑𝜑 solution for
and Equations the nominal
7.10.2-5 interaction
through 7.10.2-9.
" 𝑅𝑅" + 𝜑𝜑, 𝑅𝑅,
Figure 7.10.2-2b also shows normalized interaction curves for various 7.10.2-5
diagram can be developed using Figure 7.10.2-2 and Equations D/t ratios.
through 7.10.2-9. Figure 7.10.2-2b also shows normalized interaction curves
Figure 7.10.2-2 for various D/t ratios.
Plastic Stress Distribution for CFST
𝐷𝐷vw_ 3 𝐸𝐸$
7.8.2-1
𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸 ≤
ki Wbx𝐸𝐸k
𝐷𝐷 ≤ 0.22
𝑆𝑆\]^ 𝐷𝐷=𝑡𝑡≤ 0.22
0.22
𝐸𝐸 (7.10.2-1)
(7.10.2-1)
(7.10.2-1)
≤ 0.22 y_ 3 𝐹𝐹
𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 Kh 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (7.10.2-1)
h 𝐹𝐹
𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦
𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸
𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷 ≤ 0.15 𝐸𝐸 𝐸𝐸 (7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2)
𝐷𝐷
≤ 0.15
𝐸𝐸 𝑡𝑡≤ ≤ 0.15𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 (7.10.2-2)
0.15
𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑦𝑦
≤0.22 0.22𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 (7.10.2-1)
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡≤
≤ ≤ 0.22
0.22 𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼 𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼 == 𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠𝐸𝐸 𝑠𝑠(7.10.2-1)
(7.10.2-1)𝐼𝐼𝑆𝑆 +
(7.10.2-1)
𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼(7.10.2-1) 𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸 𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑀𝑀 (7.10.2-3) (7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3)
= 𝑆𝑆𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝐼+ 𝑆𝑆 + 𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸 𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 ≤ 0.22 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
7.9.2-1 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐸𝐸
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐼𝐼 + 𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑠𝑠 𝑆𝑆 0𝑃𝑃 z "#$% 𝑐𝑐 𝐼𝐼
4𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑐𝑐 = 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 0𝑃𝑃 z "#$% '1Y6" (7.10.2-3) 𝑐𝑐4/𝑁𝑁
z '1Y6" 𝐶𝐶/𝐼𝐼'1Y6" + 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 ′ 𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
0.15𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃 + 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 ≤ 0.9 (7.10.2-4) 𝑠𝑠
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡≤
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐶𝐶≤ ≤ ′≤ ≤0.15
=
0.15
0.15
0.15 0.15 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦+ + 𝐶𝐶𝐴𝐴′𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠=′ = = 0.15
≤
0.15
0.15
0.9
+(7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2)
+(7.10.2-4)
+(7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2) 𝑃𝑃+ 0 + 𝐴𝐴 +𝐴𝐴≤
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 +𝐴𝐴 𝑐𝑐 ≤ 0.90.9 (7.10.2-4) (7.10.2-4)
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑃𝑃0 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 +𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐 𝑃𝑃 0 𝑃𝑃0 𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 +𝐴𝐴 𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒= = =𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 ++
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
+𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑦𝑦) = ��
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑃𝑃
(7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3) 𝜋𝜋
(7.10.2-3)
𝜋𝜋 − 𝜃𝜃� 2 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 −2
2 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ ′𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟
′
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸Plastic 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝜋𝜋𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆+ + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 Stress Distribution
𝜋𝜋 (7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3) ′𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖for 𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑖𝑖 CFT (
𝑃𝑃 𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦)
(𝑦𝑦) = �� 2 − 𝜃𝜃�𝜃𝜃� − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓
𝑃𝑃 = �� − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟 𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦(7.10.2-5)
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 𝑦𝑦
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛′(𝑦𝑦) = �� 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃− 𝜃𝜃�𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑟𝑟𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑖𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
Ö ∗ 2 0.95𝑓𝑓 2 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟 𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦 𝑐𝑐 𝑚𝑚
7.10.2-5 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ′ = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
′ = ′ = 0.15 0.15 0.15 + + + 2 𝑃𝑃 + + + = 0.95𝑓𝑓 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 Figure
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
≤ ≤ 0.9 𝐴𝐴
0.9 7.10.2-2 + 𝐹𝐹
(7.10.2-4)
(7.10.2-4)
(7.10.2-4) 𝐴𝐴 𝑐𝑐
(7.10.2-5)
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠+𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 ≤ 0.9
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 Å 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 X X á,,â ,â
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′ = = 0.15 0.15 + + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃0𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃00+ + 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠+𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠+𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 ≤ 0.9
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐≤ 0.93= (7.10.2-4) (7.10.2-4) 2 2 ) 𝑐𝑐 3𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3 2
3
′ 𝑟𝑟 2
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟2𝑚𝑚
2
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃00 2𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠+𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 +𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑀𝑀 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (𝑦𝑦)
𝑀𝑀 𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦)(𝑦𝑦) 𝑐𝑐= = �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟
�𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 2𝑖𝑖 2 − − 2𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ) 2 ) − 𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓
− � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ ′𝑐𝑐 + + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
(
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) = �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 𝑀𝑀 2
𝑛𝑛 )𝑛𝑛− � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 − ′𝑦𝑦 − � 3 ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖(7.10.2-6)
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 𝑖𝑖 −2𝑦𝑦 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐3 3 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 2
𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖
′ 𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖(7.10.2-6)
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = = �� − − − 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2
− − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 3
∗ ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′ ′ −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑟𝑟 (7.10.2-5)
(7.10.2-5)
(7.10.2-5) (7 .10 .2-5)
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑐𝑐2𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 − − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 𝑖𝑖
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = �� 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋222− − 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 𝑐𝑐=
𝑐𝑐 =
− 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
= 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
∗∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓′′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (7.10.2-7)
(7.10.2-7) (7.10.2-5)
(7.10.2-7) (7.10.2-5)
𝑐𝑐 = 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐22 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-7) 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 (7.10.2-7)
3 3
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3 𝑦𝑦 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2 2 2
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −1 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)==
(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) =�𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
�𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦 22𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 −
2 2
− −𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝜃𝜃 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦22)𝜃𝜃=2 2
))−− =− 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐3𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
3
��−1 �∗∗∗−1 (( ) ))′′′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐++
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑦𝑦
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑦𝑦 ′ ′
+4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟2 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (7.10.2-8)
2 (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8) (7.10.2-6) (7.10.2-6)
(7.10.2-6)
(7.10.2-6) (7 .10 .2-6)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝜃𝜃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) =(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = =−1 �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
�𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ( 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖) − − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦2 ))𝜃𝜃 − −= 33𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
33
3� ∗∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 (0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟(7.10.2-8)
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 +
𝑚𝑚 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
+ 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-6)
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑡 (7.10.2-7)
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦= = =𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚== 𝑟𝑟− − 𝑡𝑡(7.10.2-7)
𝑡𝑡 (7.10.2-7)
(7.10.2-7) (7.10.2-9) (7.10.2-9) (7 .10 .2-7)
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑟𝑟= = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟= 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑟𝑟 −1 −
𝑡𝑡 𝑟𝑟 𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚 = 𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟 − (7.10.2-7)
2 (7.10.2-9) (7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9)
𝑚𝑚 −12𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2 2
Chapter 7 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃= = =𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 −1
−1(((𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 )))
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8) Substructure Design
2. RCFST Interaction 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 = = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 −1 –((𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 A𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚) )parametric 𝑃𝑃 (𝑦𝑦) solution= ��
𝜋𝜋 for the
(7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8) − 𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟 2 nominal interaction
− 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 (7 .10 .2-8)
𝜋𝜋 𝑃𝑃 𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦)
(𝑦𝑦)
2𝑃𝑃 = = ��
𝜋𝜋
�� −
𝜋𝜋
−𝜃𝜃� 𝜃𝜃� 2
′𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖− − 2
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ ∗
0.95𝑓𝑓 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ ′ 𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟 𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦 −𝑡𝑡
−𝑡𝑡 −𝑡𝑡 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 �4𝜃𝜃
�4𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦′ +
+(𝜋𝜋
�4𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 +
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚
diagram can 𝑃𝑃 𝑛𝑛 be(𝑦𝑦) developed= �� 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 2 − 𝜃𝜃� using 𝑟𝑟 𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖 𝑛𝑛 − Figure𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 2 0.95𝑓𝑓 2
7.10.2-3
2 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟 and 𝑚𝑚 Equations 𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦 −𝑡𝑡 𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐 �4𝜃𝜃
7.10.2-7
𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹 𝑚𝑚
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑚𝑚+ through
𝑦𝑦 (𝜋𝜋
𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏 − 2𝜃𝜃
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏 )0.95𝑓𝑓 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚= = =𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟−− −𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 (7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9) 𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐
7.10.2-14. 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 The =
= 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟internal 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 − 22− 2 2
steel reinforcing (7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9) is 2idealized as 3𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐a thin
3
ring. 𝑟𝑟 2 (7 .10 .2-9)
2
2. RCFT 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
Interaction 2 – A parametric 𝑀𝑀 𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) 3= �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 solution 2
2− 𝑦𝑦 2for )) − 𝑐𝑐the 3 nominal
��2 0.95𝑓𝑓 ∗∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′ ′interaction
′
𝑐𝑐 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟2𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 + 4𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
(𝑦𝑦) 2 𝑀𝑀2𝑛𝑛 2 (𝑦𝑦)
𝑀𝑀 ) (𝑦𝑦) 𝑐𝑐= = �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 𝑖𝑖 − ′𝑦𝑦 2𝑦𝑦)2−
− − 𝑟𝑟�3 𝑚𝑚∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 + + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦−𝐹𝐹+ + 4𝑡𝑡4𝑡𝑡 𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏′ 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑐𝑐′𝑏𝑏𝑐𝑐(𝐹𝐹 𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ≤ 0.22 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 diagram
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑀𝑀
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
𝑛𝑛 can
(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = = be �� 𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
developed − −
(7.10.2-1)𝑖𝑖 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� − 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2 𝑦𝑦
2
− − 𝑛𝑛 −
using𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ �∗ ∗
Figure
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 0.95𝑓𝑓 𝑖𝑖 ′ 𝑖𝑖
′ ′
7.10.2-3 +
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 and
3 −𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
−𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝐹𝐹 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑦𝑦 +
Equations 4𝑡𝑡
�4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
�4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟
𝑐𝑐
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑐𝑐
7.10.2-7
++
𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹 (𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
(𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
𝑟𝑟
(𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑟𝑟− 𝑦𝑦0.95𝑓𝑓
𝑖𝑖−2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
− 2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 )0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
)0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
)0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐 )′′′′ �𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐�� ((
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
0.22 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = = �� 2222−
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 − −(7.10.2-1) 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 − 2 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 2 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 − − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 3
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
′ −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑐𝑐
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦−𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 −𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 �4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
−𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 +
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
+ (𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
𝑖𝑖
− 2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
)0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐�� (
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 ≤ 0.22
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
Figure 7.10.2-3
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 (7.10.2-1) 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ST
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑖𝑖 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
�4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + (𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 − 2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 )0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 (7
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 throughPlastic Stress Distribution for𝑏𝑏reinforcing RCF
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 (7.10.2-12)
2 (7.10.2-1) 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏== 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 ≤
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 ≤ 0.22 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
0.22 7.10.2-14. (7.10.2-1)The 𝑐𝑐 internal = 𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃
steel
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃 is idealized (7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-12) as a thin ring.
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏 = 𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏222 𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏 3𝑏𝑏 3
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐3
3 𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2-12)
𝑏𝑏
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 2 2 2
Page 7-106 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)= =�𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 −𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 222))− −= ��∗∗−1 ∗∗0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑦𝑦′ ′′ + +4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 WSDOT
4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 2 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦Bridge+4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 Design 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 Manual M 23-50.16 ′ ′′ ))
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ≤ 0.15 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 ≤ 0.15 0.15 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
�𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖(7.10.2-2)
2𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 −
(7.10.2-2)
(7.10.2-2) 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦
2 − − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 22))) 𝜃𝜃 −− 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐33�𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
� 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
−1
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 (𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦′′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐+ + 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚2 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦+
+ + 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
(7.10.2-13)
4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 (𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
(𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏−
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − − −0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐) (((
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 ≤ 0.15
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝜃𝜃 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 −1 (𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖(7.10.2-2) = �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 − ) 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝜃𝜃= − 𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏 = �
3 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑟𝑟 (
3𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
3 3 ∗ −1
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 )𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)
(7.10.2-13)
𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (7.10.2-13)
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
(7.10.2-13)
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
June 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐)
2016 (7
≤ 0.15 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2-2) 𝑟𝑟
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
(7.10.2-12)
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 =
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
= 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + +𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼== = =𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(7.10.2-3) 𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴 (7.10.2-12)
𝑏𝑏(7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-12)
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼= 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3) 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏== 𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴 𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏(7.10.2-12) (7.10.2-14)
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
=
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑡𝑡𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐= 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴 𝑏𝑏
−1 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
(7.10.2-3)
(7.10.2-3)
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑡𝑡 𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏 2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟 = 2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2-14) (7.10.2-14)
(7.10.2-14)
′ 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = = = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
−1
−1
−1
( ( ( 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ) ) ) 2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2-13)
(7.10.2-13)
(7.10.2-13)
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ′′ =
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 0.15 + + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 + 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏+𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
=
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠= 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
≤𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 0.9( 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟(7.10.2-4)
−1 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 ( 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟(7.10.2-4))
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) (7.10.2-13)
(7.10.2-13)
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ′ = 0.15 0.15 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃0 + 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐≤ ≤0.9 0.9 (7.10.2-4) 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛== =𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠++ 0.5𝑉𝑉 (7.10.2-15)
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 (7.10.2-15)
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ′ =
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 0.15 0.15 + + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃000 + +𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑉𝑉
+𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 +𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐=≤ ≤ 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑉𝑉 0.9
0.9
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 + (7.10.2-4)
(7.10.2-4)
0.5𝑉𝑉 +0.5𝑉𝑉 0.5𝑉𝑉
(7.10.2-15) 𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-15)
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
+𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑛𝑛 =
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏2𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏=
+𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 =𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑠𝑠𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐
1.47𝐹𝐹 (7.10.2-14)
(7.10.2-14)
(7.10.2-14)
𝑡𝑡
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 0
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖22= =−2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑤𝑤 𝑢𝑢 (7.10.2-14)
𝑢𝑢 𝑡𝑡(7.10.2-14)
′ ′′ 𝑤𝑤 ≥≥ (7.10.2-5) (7.10.3-1)
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = �� 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋2 − −𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 1.47𝐹𝐹 1.47𝐹𝐹 𝑡𝑡
∗𝑢𝑢∗∗0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 1.47𝐹𝐹 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑤𝑤 ≥𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑢𝑢 (7.10.2-5) (7.10.3-1)
(7.10.3-1)
′′−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) =
= ��
�� 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 −
− 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑤𝑤
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 2 ≥−
−
2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝐹𝐹 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (7.10.3-1) (7.10.2-5)
(7.10.2-5)
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = �� 22 − 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 2
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = − = =𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
𝐹𝐹 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠+ + +
∗ 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 (7.10.2-15)
(7.10.2-15)
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (7.10.2-15)
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 (7.10.2-5)
2 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 =
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛2= 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠333+ 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ′ 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
2 2
(7.10.2-15)
2(7.10.2-15)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖222 − −𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 22)) 1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 − 1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3�𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢�𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢2𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡∗ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡∗ 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′ ′ + 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝐷𝐷 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
2𝑜𝑜22𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢 𝐷𝐷 (7.10.2-6)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 ≥ − 1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑙𝑙 ≥
4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 + 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹
(7.10.3-1) 𝑢𝑢 𝑢𝑢 − 𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 (7.10.2-6) (7.10.3-2)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2 − 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 2 ≥ ≥))≥−≥) −1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐3 𝐷𝐷 3 �
𝑜𝑜𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑢𝑢𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′𝑙𝑙𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑙𝑙≥ ≥ + 𝑒𝑒 𝐷𝐷 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑜𝑜 �
𝑜𝑜𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑜𝑜 2
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 +
2 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
(7.10.3-1)
(7.10.3-1)
+ − − (7.10.2-6)
(7.10.2-6) (7.10.3-2)
(7.10.3-2)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 2 −𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒≥
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2 −� 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
3 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
3𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 �
� ∗
∗ + 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑒𝑒− +
+ 𝑒𝑒 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
�
4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 � 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
4𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 4
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 4
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
(7.10.3-1)
(7.10.3-1)
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
(7.10.3-2)
6 � 𝑓𝑓 ′
′ 𝑓𝑓 ′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2
2
2 (7.10.2-6)
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
3
3
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 4 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 6 � 6 𝑓𝑓 �
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 = = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 22 (7.10.2-7)
(7.10.2-7)
6 � 𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
=
= 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜22𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 (7.10.2-7)
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
(7.10.2-7)
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 = 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒≥ 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 ≥ ≥ � 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 4 + 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 −
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + (7.10.2-7)
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
− −𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜2 2𝐷𝐷22 (7.10.3-2) (7.10.3-2)
(7.10.3-2)
250𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐷𝐷
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠−1 −1 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
−1((𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 )) 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒≥ ≥� � 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
+ + (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8)
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
′ − − (7.10.3-2)
(7.10.3-2) (7.10.3-3)
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐ℎ ℎ =
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 � 4 4 6 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒′ 22𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷 +
� 250𝐶𝐶 250𝐶𝐶 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − 𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 −1 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ( 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ) ℎ = � 𝐷𝐷4 4 2
Plastic
+
6
6
6
250𝐶𝐶 � � �
(7.10.2-8) 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ′
′ Stress
′ 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
− ℎ
=
2 2 =� � Distribution
4 + + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
(7.10.3-3) 𝑓𝑓′ − −
for 2 RCFT (7.10.3-3) (7.10.3-3)
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 =
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ((𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ))
−1 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
�4 6 � �
�
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
(7.10.2-8)
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
(7.10.2-8)𝑓𝑓′
2 4 4 �
�
𝑓𝑓′
� 𝑓𝑓′
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 2
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 − − 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
(7.10.2-9) Figure 7.10.2-3
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 222 250𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (7.10.2-9)
250𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
250𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
(7.10.2-9) 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷= 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷= 𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐 + 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 (7.10.3-4)
(7.10.3-4)
(7.10.3-4)
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 − 𝐶𝐶 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2= 𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝐶𝐶+ 𝑐𝑐 + 𝐶𝐶(7.10.3-3)
𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠(7.10.3-3) (7.10.3-3)
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
22 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ℎℎ = ℎ ℎ = = � � 2 +250𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
+ + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
− − − 𝑠𝑠(7.10.3-4)
==� 𝐶𝐶𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷4𝑐𝑐44+ 𝐶𝐶250𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 � 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 − − 22 ℎ = � + + 𝑠𝑠�� (7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9)
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒′
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒′
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −
− 22 (7.10.3-3)
(7.10.3-3)
2 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 4 4 � 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒′
�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑑𝑑 ≥ ℎ2 +
2 ℎ + 𝑙𝑙 (7.10.3-5)
(7.10.3-5)
−(7.10.3-5)
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = �� 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋2 − −𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 𝑑𝑑𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖222ℎ− −+𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗∗𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑑𝑑𝑓𝑓′𝑑𝑑′′𝑓𝑓≥ ≥ ℎ+ 𝑙𝑙 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑙𝑙𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹−𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 (𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋(𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 )0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 )0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
′ ′ (7 .10 .2-10)
(7.10.2-10)
(7.10.2-10)
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 −𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟≥ = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑙𝑙+𝑒𝑒+ + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′𝑓𝑓−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑒𝑒𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟(7.10.3-5)
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(7.10.3-4)
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 �4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 ++ −2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �′′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
= ��
�� 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 −
− 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑓𝑓𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 =
2
2= = −
− 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
+ 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ∗
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
∗ 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′ −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 −𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
−𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃(7.10.3-4)
(7.10.3-4)
(7.10.3-4) 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
�4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 +
+
(𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
(𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 −
− 2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 )0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
)0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′ �� (7.10.2-10)
(7.10.2-10)
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = �� 22 − 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 2 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 =
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝐷𝐷−𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ∗𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
≥ 𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜 + 𝑜𝑜 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚1.75𝑙𝑙
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (7.10.3-4)
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 −𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + (𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 −
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 )0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 3-6)
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 � (7.10.2-10)
𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
2 𝑑𝑑
𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ℎ 2 ℎ ℎ +
𝑜𝑜
+ + + 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
3
1.75𝑙𝑙3 𝑑𝑑 𝑒𝑒 𝑑𝑑′ ≥ 𝑒𝑒 ≥ 2 + + 1.75𝑙𝑙
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 1.75𝑙𝑙
2 2 𝑒𝑒
(7.10.3-5)
(7.10.
(7.10.3-5)
(7.10.3-5)
𝑒𝑒 𝑒𝑒 3-6) (7.10. (7.10. ′ 3-6) 3-6) 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = = �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
�𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2 − −𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒
𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑2𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≥ 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
≥ ℎℎ22+ 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2 ) ) − − 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 3� � ∗ ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑒𝑒 ′ + + 2 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
2 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
2 + 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(7.10.3-5) + 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 − −0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ) ′
) (7.10.2-11)
(7.10.2-11)
))+−𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒3𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐333 � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖22(7.10.3-5)
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ) (7 .10 .2-11)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
= �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
�𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 2 −
− 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2
− � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 (𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − − 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
) (7.10.2-11)
(7.10.2-11)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑− 2
≥ ≥ 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜)𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜++ 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 − + 𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒1.75𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 3
1.75𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑠𝑠
+
≤𝑠𝑠 ≤ ≤
𝑙𝑙
𝑒𝑒 𝑙𝑙 𝑒𝑒
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹(7.10. 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
(7.10. 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
3-6)
3-6) 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − (7.10.3-7)
(7.10.3-7)
(7.10.3-7) 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ) (7.10.2-11)
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = ≥≥𝑠𝑠 22≤
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 1.75𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 3
1.75𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒(7.10.2-12)
3 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2.5 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 (7.10.
(7.10.
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
(7.10.3-7) 3-6)
3-6)
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
= 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≥ 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
22+ +2.5 1.75𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
(7.10.2-12)2.52.5 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 (7.10. 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
3-6)
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 2 (7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-12) (7 .10 .2-12)
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 =
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
−1 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐≤≤
𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
≤𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙2.5 (7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-13) (7.10.3-7)
(7.10.3-7)
(7.10.3-7)
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠−1 ( (
−1 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 )
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ) 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ≤
) 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ≤ 2.5 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 (7.10.2-13) (7.10.3-7)
(7.10.3-7)
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 −1 (
−1 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2.5
2.5 (7.10.2-13)
(7.10.2-13)
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
((𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 )
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) 2.5
(7.10.2-13) (7 .10 .2-13)
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = = 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 (7.10.2-14)
(7.10.2-14)
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2-14)
(7.10.2-14)
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 =
= 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 (7.10.2-14) (7 .10 .2-14)
WSDOT Bridge Design𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 =Manual = 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 +
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉M 23-50.19 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-15)
(7.10.2-15) Page 7-101
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 = 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 + 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-15)
July 2019 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 =
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 =1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
The associated variables are defined as: 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢+
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 +𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-15)
(7.10.2-15)
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 ≥
1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
≥ 1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 (7.10.3-1)
(7.10.3-1)
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 ≥ 1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 (7.10.3-1)
𝜃𝜃 = 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝜃𝜃 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠−1((𝑟𝑟𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 )) (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8)
𝜃𝜃 =
= 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠−1 ((𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 )
𝑚𝑚 ) (7.10.2-8)
(7.10.2-8)
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑡 𝑚𝑚
Chapter 7 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚 = − 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
= 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 − (7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9) Substructure Design
= 𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 = 𝑟𝑟 − 2222
𝑚𝑚 − (7.10.2-9)
(7.10.2-9)
𝜋𝜋 2
𝜋𝜋
𝜋𝜋 − 𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 2 ′′ �4𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ′′ �
𝑃𝑃 (𝑦𝑦)
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦) =
(𝑦𝑦) = ��
��𝜋𝜋222 −
= �� −
𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 22 −
− 𝜃𝜃� 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦�
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗∗∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓
− 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� 0.95𝑓𝑓 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟
0.95𝑓𝑓 ′′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦
−4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 −𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏
−𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 �4𝜃𝜃
�4𝜃𝜃 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + (𝜋𝜋
+ (𝜋𝜋 −
− 2𝜃𝜃
2𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏 )0.95𝑓𝑓
𝑏𝑏 )0.95𝑓𝑓 ′′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �
� (7.10.2-10)
(7.10.2-10)
𝑃𝑃 𝑐𝑐
𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹
𝑚𝑚 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 −𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 �4𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹
𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + (𝜋𝜋 − 2𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏 )0.95𝑓𝑓 (7.10.2-10)
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 � (7.10.2-10)
2
𝑐𝑐 33 𝑟𝑟 22
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦)
𝑀𝑀 (𝑦𝑦) = �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 2222 −
= �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦2222)) −
− 𝑦𝑦 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′′′′ 𝑐𝑐 +
− 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐333�� ∗∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑚𝑚 2
4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 +
𝑚𝑚 2 𝐹𝐹 + 4𝑡𝑡
4𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(𝐹𝐹
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐 (𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 0.95𝑓𝑓 ′′′′ 𝑐𝑐 ))
− 0.95𝑓𝑓
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 − (7.10.2-11)
(7.10.2-11)
𝑀𝑀
𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦)
(𝑦𝑦) = �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟 𝑖𝑖 − 𝑦𝑦 ))
= �𝑐𝑐(𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 − 𝑦𝑦 − 33 � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 + 4𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 − 0.95𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ))
− 3 � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐 + 4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟 𝑖𝑖
𝑖𝑖 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦 + 4𝑡𝑡 𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 − 0.95𝑓𝑓 (7.10.2-11)
(7.10.2-11)
(7.10.2-11)
𝑖𝑖
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 == 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-12)
𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2-12)
(7.10.2-12) (7.10.2-12)
−1 𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦
𝜃𝜃
𝜃𝜃 = 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 −1 ( 𝑦𝑦 ) (7.10.2-13)
(7.10.2-13)
𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 =
= 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠−1
−1 ( 𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦 )
((𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) ) (7.10.2-13)
(7.10.2-13) (7.10.2-13)
𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴
𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴 𝑏𝑏
𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏 = 𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴 (7.10.2-14)
(7.10.2-14) (7.10.2-14)
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 =
= 2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟
2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟
2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟
𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (7.10.2-14)
2𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑉𝑉 The
= 𝑉𝑉 associated+ 𝑐𝑐 variables are defined
0.5𝑉𝑉 as:
(7.10.2-15)
𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 r =
𝑉𝑉 = 𝑉𝑉 𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + + 0.5𝑉𝑉
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
0.5𝑉𝑉 (7.10.2-15)
(7.10.2-15)
1.47𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢= 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
radius
𝑐𝑐 to the outside of the steel tube (in)
𝑤𝑤 ≥
𝑤𝑤 ≥r 1.47𝐹𝐹
1.47𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢
1.47𝐹𝐹 𝑢𝑢=
𝑡𝑡 radius (7.10.3-1)
to the inside of the steel tube (in)
(7.10.3-1)
𝑤𝑤 ≥
𝑤𝑤 ≥i 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑢𝑢 (7.10.3-1)
(7.10.3-1)
𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
rm 𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒= radius to the center of the steel tube (in)
𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜22 radius
≥bm� 𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜22=
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢 to the
r 𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 center (7.10.3-2)
of the internal reinforcing bars (in)
𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹 𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜
𝐷𝐷
𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≥ 𝑜𝑜 +
+ 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢
𝑢𝑢 − − 𝐷𝐷 (7.10.3-2)
≥
𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≥t � �
� 44 = 4
4 +
+ wall 6�
6 �𝑓𝑓 ′𝑢𝑢 −
𝑓𝑓′ thickness
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 − 2
2
2
2
𝑜𝑜 (7.10.3-2)
of the(7.10.3-2)
tube (in)
6�
6 𝑓𝑓′′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
�𝑓𝑓
t b = wall thickness
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 of a notional steel ring equivalent to the internal reinforcement (in)
c 𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷22 = 250𝐶𝐶 one𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚half the𝐷𝐷 chord length of the tube in compression (in)
ℎ = �
� 𝐷𝐷22 + 250𝐶𝐶 250𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − 𝐷𝐷
𝐷𝐷
𝐷𝐷 (7.10.3-3)
ℎ=
ℎ = b�c
� 44 +𝐷𝐷 4 =
+ � one
250𝐶𝐶 𝑓𝑓′ half
�𝑓𝑓′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 − − 22 chord length
the of a notional steel ring equivalent to the internal
(7.10.3-3)
(7.10.3-3)
4 � 𝑓𝑓′
𝑓𝑓′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2
2
reinforcement in compression (in)
� 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = = 𝐶𝐶 𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + + 𝐶𝐶 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (7.10.3-4)
(7.10.3-4)
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 angle used to define(7.10.3-4)
𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = θ 𝐶𝐶 + =
𝐶𝐶 c (rad.)
(7.10.3-4)
𝑑𝑑
𝑑𝑑 ≥ ℎ θ+ 𝑙𝑙 = angle used to define (7.10.3-5)
cb (rad.) θb shall be taken as π/2 if y/rb is greater than 1 and θb shall
(7.10.3-5)
𝑑𝑑𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ≥
𝑑𝑑 ≥ℎ
≥ ℎ+
ℎ +b 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
+ (7.10.3-5)
(7.10.3-5)
𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 be taken as -π/2 if y/r b is less than -1.
𝐷𝐷
𝑑𝑑 ≥
≥ 𝐷𝐷22𝑜𝑜A+
𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≥
𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜 +
+ 1.75𝑙𝑙
b 1.75𝑙𝑙
1.75𝑙𝑙 = 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒area of a typical steel (7.10.
(7.10. 3-6)
bar comprising
3-6) the internal reinforcement (in2)
𝑑𝑑 2 𝑒𝑒
𝑒𝑒 (7.10. 3-6)
2n 𝑙𝑙
𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒
= number of internal steel reinforcing bars
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ≤
𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒
≤ 2.5
𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 (7.10.3-7)
(7.10.3-7)
≤
𝑠𝑠 ≤ 2.5
2.5
2.5
(7.10.3-7)Seismic 8.16.2 for piles with permanent steel
(7.10.3-7)
The requirements of AASHTO
casing shall be applied to RCFST. Accordingly, the extent of longitudinal
reinforcement may be reduced to only the upper portion of the member as
needed to provide the required resistance of the member.
For CFST and RCFST, the area of the steel casing shall be included in the
determination of the longitudinal reinforcement ratio. For RCFST, the minimum
required longitudinal reinforcement ratio may be reduced to 0.005.
F. Stability Considerations for Unbraced of Partially-braced Members
Piles and shafts are typically assumed to be continually braced by the surrounding
soil. Therefore they are not normally subject to P-∆ effects or other secondary
effects. However, it is recognized that special circumstances such as scour, soil
liquefaction, piles used in marine structures, or other conditions may leave piles and
shafts subject to less than full bracing. In these circumstances, it may be necessary to
consider stability effects.

July 2019
7 .9 .2-1 �𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 � = �𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 �/𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶/𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 + 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾
G. Shear Resistance
The shear resistance of CFST and RCFST shall be taken as:
7 .10 .2-15 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = ф𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = ф𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤4 �𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤1 �0.6𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤2 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 � + 0.0316𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤3 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ � (7.10.2-15)
Where:
As = cross-sectional area of the steel tube
Ac = area of concrete within the steel tube
g1 = coefficient for the shear capacity of the steel tube = 2.0
g2 = coefficient for the effective shear area of steel tube = 0.5
g3 = coefficient for the effect on concrete strength in shear due to confinement from the
steel tube = 3.0
g4 = coefficient for bond development between the concrete and steel tube = 1.0
The value of 1.0 for term g4 is based on the assumption that the tube is fully
developed as a composite section with the concrete and should be at least one
diameter, D, from the point of maximum moment. If this condition is not satisfied, a
reduction in g4 may be required.
Equation 7.10.2-15 does not account for the influence of axial load on shear capacity.
An alternate equation is presented in the UW research that accounts for axial load
and can be utilized at the designer’s discretion.
H. Corrosion
The design wall thickness for tubes shall be reduced for corrosion over a 75-year
minimum design life. Minimum corrosion rates are specified below, except that the
design thickness loss due to corrosion shall not be taken to be less than 1/16 inch.
Soil embedded zone (undisturbed soil): 0.001 inch per year
Soil embedded zone (fill or disturbed soils): 0.003 inch per year
Immersed Zone (fresh water): 0.002 inch per year
Immersed and Tidal Zone (salt water): 0.004 inch per year
Splash Zone (salt water): 0.006 inch per year
Atmospheric Zone: 0.004 inch per year
The corrosion rates are taken from July 2008 CALTRANS memo to Designers 3-1,
FHWA NHI-05-042 Design and Construction of Driven Pile Foundations, and the
Washington State Ferries Terminal Design Manual.
The rates for corrosion in soil above assume that the soil is not highly corrosive.
A site-specific assessment should be considered where a corrosive soil environment
is suspected or known to exist. The potential for scour shall be considered when
choosing a design corrosion rate.
If a protective coating were applied to the steel tube, then the corrosion is assumed
to begin at the end of the effective life of the coating. Coating effective life is
generally assumed to be 15 years.

July 2019
7.10.3 CFST-to-Cap Annular Ring Connections

CFST-to-cap connections shall be designed as fully-restrained connections capable of
resisting all load effects. The preferred connection to a concrete cap includes an annular
ring at the top of the embedded tube. The connection design involves:
• Design of the annular ring
• Determination of the embedment depth
• A punching shear evaluation in the cap
• General design of the cap for flexure and shear
An alternative to the annular ring connection involves using a conventional reinforcing
cage to splice the CFST to the cap.
• Reinforced concrete connection design
A. Annular Ring
An annular ring shall be welded to the end of the tube to provide anchorage and
stress distribution, as shown in Figure 7.10.3-1. The ring shall be made of a steel
of the same thickness and grade as the steel tube. The ring shall extend outside
and inside the tube a distance of 8t, where t is the thickness of the tube after
considering corrosion.
The ring shall have 1” diameter vent holes near the connection to the CFST to ensure
concrete consolidation under the annular ring. There shall be a minimum of 4 holes
equally spaced on the ring both outside the tube and inside the tube as shown in
Figure 7.10.3-1.

July 2019
Figure 7.10.3-1 Annular Ring Connections

GREATER OF 12t OR 6"
PILE/SHAFT CAP OR CROSSBEAM
Do
A
8t 8t
t
PULL-OUT
FAILURE CONE
t
ANNULAR D
h
le RING PLATE
Dr
CASING
iNTERNAL REBAR
(WHEN INCLUDED)
n = # OF EQUALLY
SPACED BARS
PILE CAP OR CAP BEAM
1" CLR MIN

1" ø VENT HOLE (TYP)
de (TYP)
SECTION A
ANNULAR RING CONNECTIONS

FIGURE 7.10.3-1

July 2019
The ring shall be welded to the tube with complete joint penetration (CJP) welds
or fillet welds on both the inside and outside of the tube. The fillet welds must be
capable of developing the full tensile capacity of the tube. For this purpose, the
minimum size, w, of the fillet welds shall be taken as:
1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
7 .10 .3-1 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 ≥ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 (7.10.3-1)
Where Fu is the specified minimum tensile strength of the tube steel (ksi), and Fexx
is the classification strength of the weld metal (ksi). The fillet weld size equation is
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2
based on AASHTO and does not𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝include the effects − 2𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 of loading direction. To further
3.95𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
7 .10 .3-2 ≥ � 4𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 +
�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
refine the weld size requirements to include loading direction, refer to the AISC
Steel Construction Manual. Typical CFST weld details are shown in Figure 7.10.3-
2. Note that access issues on the inside of the tube limit the constructibility of
Options 1 and 3. 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2 5.27𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
7 .10 .3-3 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ � 4
𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
+ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
− 2
𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
Figure 7.10.3-2 Annular Ring Weld Detail
ANNULAR RING PLATE
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷0 2 5.271.68𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
7 .10 .3-4 ℎ≥� + − 2 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
4
W
TYP. CJP
W
7 .10 .3-5
(OPTION 1) 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (OPTION 2)
CASING
7 .10 .3-6
OPTION 1 AND OPTION 2
W -7 .10 .3-7
SIZE 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝WELDS
≥ 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾 TO DEVELOP
FULL CAPACITY OF CASING WALL
7 .10 .3-8 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 = 0.65𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡

.5W
TYP. CJP
.5W
𝜓𝜓𝜓𝜓𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
(OPTION7.10.3-9
3) 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥
2�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
(OPTION 4)
2 ANNULAR RING
PLATES
CASING
OPTION 3 AND OPTION 4

NOTE: FOR OPTION 3, THE MINIMUM FILLET WELD SIZE SHALL
BE LIMITED TO MINIMUM FILLET WELD SIZE PER AWS D1.1
Annular Ring Weld Detail

Figure 7.10.3-2

July 2019
1.33𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
7 .10 .3-1 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 ≥ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
B. Embedment 1.33𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
7 .10 .3-1 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 ≥ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
≤ 0.22 (7.10.2-1) 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
The tube and the annular ring be embedded
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 shall
into the pile cap a distance, le, as
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
defined in the following equations.
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 To develop
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 the yield strength of the CFST and
≤ 0.15 (7.10.2-2)
plastic behavior is not expected, then
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
2
the embedment
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 length shall satisfy:
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 3.95𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
7 .10 .3-2 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ � 4𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
+𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆−+ 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 (7.10.2-3)
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 2 3.95𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
′
�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
2
7 .10 .3-2 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ � 4 ′+ −𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 2 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (7.10.3-2)
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 0.15 �𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐+ + 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 +𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 ≤ 0.9 (7.10.2-4)
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 0 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋
To ensure full plastic 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛�(𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
behavior1.33�
of the CFST,
= ��then the
− 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃� 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 2embedment length
− 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′
shall satisfy:
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (
2
7 .10 .3-1 �≥ � �
B. Embedment
7 .10 .3-1
1.33� �� 2� � 5.27𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 2
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝�≥≥�� 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 2𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷−
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 2 ′
7 .10 .3-3 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
+ 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
≤ = �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
0.22 − 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ) − 3 � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
(7.10.2-1) (
The tube and the annular ring 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜shall be 4
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 5.27𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟embedded
′ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 into the pile cap with adequate (7.10.3-3)
7 .10 .3-3 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ �1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 +𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 − 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
(7.10.2-7)
embedment 7 .10 .3-1
depth to ensure 4 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢=
ductile 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 behavior
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ′ 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 of 2 the connection. The minimum
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 1.33�
≥ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹� � ≤�0.15 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-2)
7 .10 .3-1 � ≥
embedment length, le, shall �satisfy: 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠compressive −1 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ) � strength of the (7.10.2-8)
Where f'cf (ksi) is the specified 28-day
�� 2 3.95�� cap, Do is the
7 .10 .3-2 �
outside diameter of the annular ring ≥ � +
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
−
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 +
�
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶′𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 (7.10.2-3)
�4 2 as3.95�� shown ′𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 � in � Figure 7.10.3-1. This embedment
� 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 2 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
length will7 .10 .3-2
develop the full ≥ �2 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟�𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
�� plastic capacity = 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟�−� ��
+ of the −𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 CFST. �
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 As part (7.10.2-9)
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷0 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷4 2 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶5.27𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ′
=�𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
0.15
� ′ ��
2
+𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2+ ≤ 0.9 of(7.10.2-4)
the displacement (7 .10 .3-2)
7 .10 .3-4
based design of7 .10 .3-2 ℎ
the structure, ≥ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝�≥hinge +𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
+
3.95𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
lengths 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 −𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 +𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
and
−
𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 strain
0 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 limits 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 will need to be defined
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷4� 4 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
2
0 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟= ′ �� −2 2
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 −𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + (
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 − 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
5.27𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
�� 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
7 .10 .3-4
for the CFST. Values forℎthe ≥� hinge 2+ length
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
3.95�� and
2 strain 𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 � − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖limits 2 have not been ′ well
Except that for
7 .10 .3-2 capacity
� ≥ protected
�4 �
+ (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛connections,
� = ��
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
�
− 2 − the
� 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟embedment
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 length 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
shallA 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚satisfy:
documented in the research, �� however4 for �′
steel 2casing 2 2 2
fabricated 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3 from′
ASTM 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 2709
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) � =��𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 − 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ) − � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹2 + 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
GR 50 steel, an assumed hinge length �� 2 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 5.27��
of one diameter, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
�2�− 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2 ) −
D, 3and reduced
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ′ ultimate 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
7 .10 .3-3 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦) = �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
� � ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
tensile strain of 0.13 may��be≥used. ��𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦4𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏22 = + 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
′
− 2 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 3
(7.10.2-12)
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
(7 .10 .3-3) 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
1.33�
5.27��
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
� 1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹� � 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 �
𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 �
7 .10 .3-3 7 .10 .3-1
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶�𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚�𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐≥
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷�
=��𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶4𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐4𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜�+ +≥ 5.27𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢� � 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
− 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢−
C. Punching7 .10 .3-5
��
Shear
7 .10 .3-3 7 .10 .3-1 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦+ = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟≥𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖�′𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 −1′ 2 2 (7.10.2-7)
7 .10 .3-5 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏+=𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
� 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 �� 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
�𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐��(𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 )
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
(7.10.2-13)
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
TheWhere f'cf (ksi)
pile cap is theadequate
shall have specified 2concrete 28-day 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 =𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠compressive −1 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠depth, ( ) h, to strength precludeofpunching (7.10.2-8)
the cap, throughDo is thethe
�� 5.27�� 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 � 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ��
outside
pile diameter
cap.7 .10 .3-3
The value ofof hthe�shall annular𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏ring
� ≥ satisfy:
= as shown in Figure 7.10.3-1. (7.10.2-14)
� 4 +𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 =�′𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 −
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡− 2
(7.10.2-9)
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �
C. Punching Shear 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ≤
7 .10 .3-6 2
�𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷02𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 = 5.27� 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
��
+ 2
2
0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 � (7.10.2-15)
7 .10 .3-4 2 3.95��
1.68𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ��− −�� 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ��
7 .10 .3-4
7 .10 .3-2 ℎ
2.5
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ℎ ≥≥�� 442𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛�+�+≥ � 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷2+
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 − � �
𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋 2 3.95𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 � 2 −𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 (7.10.3-4)
7 .10 .3-6
The pile7 .10 .3-4 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
cap shall have2.57 .10 .3-2
≤ adequate � 0 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
concrete (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
5.27�
�
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ≥
′ ′
1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
� � = �� 4
𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 ��
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢�depth, h, 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖above − +
� � 𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃�
�′ 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
�� − −
2 the ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
steel tube
′
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 −4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 −𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 +
to preclude
ℎ ≥ � 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤+≥ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹� ′ of h 2shall satisfy:
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �� 4− 2 −��𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟� ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 (7.10.3-1)
punching through the pile cap.4The value
�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
In addition to the total cap depth requirement, 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦)
��
= �𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟h, 2a − minimum
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 2)
−
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3of 12t or ′6”, whichever
� ∗ 0.95𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 4𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 2
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 + 4𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 2 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
is greater, shall be provided above 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒the
𝜓𝜓𝜓𝜓�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒0𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹2𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 ≥
5.27� annular + ring.
� A layer
− of 3 longitudinal
(7.10.3-2)
7 .10 .3-4
7.10.3-7 ℎ𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝≥ + � 4 −6 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒−
��
≥𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦+ �2 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ��
2
reinforcement above the
7 .10 .3-5 �2𝜓𝜓𝜓𝜓�𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒4𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′
annular 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹= ring
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 shall
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏�𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
= be provided
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃
�𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠′ �� 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 to engage (7.10.2-12) the punching (7 .10 .3-4) shear
7.10.3-7
7 .10 .3-5
strut forces. 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ = � 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 +
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 � � 2 5.27��
7 .10 .3-3 �� 2�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐�� ≥ �
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 =𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷�
�
2𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
−1+ 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
( ) ′ 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 2
� �
(7.10.2-13)
7 .10 .3-5 �� = ℎ��=+ � � +
4 250𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 2𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
��5.27𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜(7.10.3-3)
Where
Wherethe total
the totalcompressive
7 .10 .3-3
compressive force force of𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐of the ≥ thecouple,
�
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 4couple, +C C , shall ��
� �4𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 maxmax
2
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
−be be
, shall taken as:as:
taken
7 .10 .3-6 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 ′ 2
𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 �𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (7.10.2-14)
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
2 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
2𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 +2𝜋𝜋𝜋𝜋𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 (7.10.3-4) (7.10.3-5)
(7 .10 .3-5)
7 .10 .3-6
7.10.3-8
7 .10 .3-5 �𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝��
≥� = 4� �+ + 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 � �= 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 − + 0.5𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 (7.10.2-15)
and are the compression 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 2≥ ℎ2𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 +
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙′𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒the
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 2
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 (7.10.3-5)
Cc C Cs C
c and7.10.3-8 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ≥ 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 forces
s are the compression
7 .10 .3-6 forces �in in the concrete concrete and and thethe steel due
steel duetotothe
the
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
7 .10 .3-7 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠� =
+
0.65𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
1.47𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 − 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
4 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 ≥ 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 2 (7.10.3-1)
combined
combined bending
bending andandaxial load
axial ≥as
𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒load computed bybythe plastic � stress distribution
ℎ2as
� computed the −plastic stress distribution
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 ′
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 �0 2 5.27�
− ��(7.10. 3-6)
𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
7 .10 .3-4 ≥+� 1.75𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒+
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
��
method
method forfor
the most
the mostextreme
extremeload loadeffect effectat 4 at 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷the
2theappropriate
appropriate
′
1.68𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
�� 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
2 limit
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 state.
limit state.
7 .10 .3-7 �7 .10 .3-4
7 .10 .3-6 � ≥� 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ≤
ℎ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒≥ � 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 24 + 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
≥ � 4 + �𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 2.5
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 −
− 2𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 2 (7.10.3-7) (7.10.3-2)
D. D.Pile
PileCap
Capand/or Cap Beam Reinforcement
Reinforcement 𝜓𝜓𝜓𝜓𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
7 .10 .3-7
7.10.3-8�� ≥ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐�
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ 2 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 6 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒′ � 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
The pile
The capcap
pile should
shouldfollow conventional
follow conventional
� 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
design practice
design practice andand
must
mustbe be
adequate
adequate to to
sustain thethe
sustain foundation
foundationdesign loads.
design loads. ℎHowever,
=However,
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2
+ thethe concrete
concrete
250𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
−
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 cap
capthickness
thicknessshall
(7.10.3-3) shallbebe
7 .10 .3-5 � �
= 4�and + �
large
large 7 .10 .3-8
enough
enough to preclude
to preclude
7 .10 .3-7 �� ≥ � punching
punching shear and
shear
�� cone
�cone
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒′
� pullout
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 ofof
pullout the CFST
the CFT piles.
piles. The
minimum concrete cap 7 .10 .3-5
df,𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦shall be 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
taken𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 as: concrete
edge 7 .10 .3-8 bethickness, + =
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (7.10.3-4)
2 2𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
The distance shall 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐large
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ �enough to 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
−accommodate struts originating
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
7.10.3-9
4 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ′ 2
at the base of the ring. The minimum 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≥ ℎedge + 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 distance, de, measured (7.10.3-5)
from center-of-
(7 .10 .3-6)
tube to the edge of7 .10 .3-6
the cap shall be taken as:
7 .10 .3-8
The edge distance shall��be
7.10.3-9 ≥ large
� �
� ��
𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≥ enough
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
�� + 1.75𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 to accommodate
𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 concrete struts
(7.10. 3-6)oriented
from the7 .10 .3-6
�� 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 2
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾 at the base of the ring. The minimum
2 �′
60 degrees vertical (7.10.3-6)
�� ≥ 2 originating edge
��
��
7.10.3-9 �� 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
�′��𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ≤
distance, de, measured from center-of-tube
� (7.10.3-7)
to the edge of the cap shall be taken as:
2.5
July 2019 7 .10 .3-7 �� ≥ � (7 .10 .3-7)
7.10.3-9 �� ≥ 2 �� 𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗
� ��′
CFSTs shall be adequately spaced to avoid intersecting concrete struts. The cap shall
be designed to resist all flexural load effects. The flexural reinforcement in both
directions shall be spaced uniformly across the length and width of the cap, but the
bottom mat of flexural reinforcement will be interrupted by the concrete tube. The
interrupted bars shall be provided, but they shall not be relied on to contribute to
the flexural resistance of the cap. Figure 7.10.3-3 shows the configuration of the
longitudinal reinforcing where it conflicts with the steel tube. Standard 90° hooks
shall be used.
Figure 7.10.3-3 Reinforcement Detail at Cap Connection

As jv
¢ BENT
Le (TYP)
As jv
JOINT VERTICAL
REINFORCEMENT (TYP) 90° BEND IN LONGITUDINAL
REINFORCEMENT
Le (TYP)
SECTION A
The cap shall be designed to resist all shear load

FIGURE 7.10.3-3 effects. Note that the minimum
required embedment results in an average shear stress in the critical area surrounding
the tube of 6√f’c (psi). Assuming the concrete is capable of resisting a shear stress of
approximately 2√f’c, vertical reinforcement will be required to resist an average shear
stress of approximately 4√f’c. Additional requirements for shear demand resulting
from other load combinations must also be considered.

July 2019
7 .10 .3-1 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 ≥ 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
7 .10 .3-5 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 2 3.95𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
7 .10 .3-2 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥
� 4 the anchorage + −
Vertical ties shall be provided within �𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
2 regions such that vertical ties
intersect the pull-out cone on each side 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 of the
2
CFST
3.95𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 subject
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 to shear. The vertical
7 .10 .3-2 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾≥ � 4𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 +
7 .10 .3-6 − 2𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
reinforcing, As , shall be included according to
jv
�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟Equation
′
7.10.3-7 where Ast is the
total area of the steel tube embedded into the cap. This value provides a conservative
amount of vertical reinforcing steel and satisfies the 4√f’c requirement.
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2
𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗𝑗 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 + 5.27𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
7 .10 .3-3
7 .10 .3-7 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠�
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
= 0.65𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴′𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 − (7.10.3-7)
4 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2 5.27𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
7.10.4 CFST-to-Cap Reinforced Concrete
7 .10 .3-3 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥Connections
𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
� + −
4 2
�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
A circular reinforcing with headed longitudinal 𝜓𝜓𝜓𝜓𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦
bars may be used to connect a CFST
member to a concrete7.10.3-8
cap, where𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝the
≥ steel 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
casing is discontinued just below the cap.
2�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
Terminating the steel casing below the 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷0 2cap,5.27𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 as opposed 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 to terminating at the bottom
7 .10 .3-4 ℎ≥� 4 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
− 2 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
of the cap or just inside the cap, reduces the�chances 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 of concrete spalling at relatively
low demands. The reinforcing cage shall satisfy 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷0 2 all of𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
5.27𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 the requirements
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 for a reinforced
7 .10 .3-4 ℎ≥� 4 + − 2 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
concrete connection, as well as the additional requirements �𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ′ in this section.
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2 2𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
7.10.3-9
A. CFST Requirements 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ � 4 + 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 − 2
7 .10 .3-5 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
A steel ring shall be welded𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚to = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 the inside
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠of the steel casing 3” below the top of
casing to aid in transfer of forces from the reinforcement cage to the steel casing.
A square bar the 7 .10 .3-5
size of the steel 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
casing = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐wall
+ 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶thickness,
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 or a maximum of 1”, is
sufficient. The bar may be continuous or consist of discontinuous segments, however
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
the total length shall be
7 .10 .3-8 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ≤at2.5
least 75% of the steel casing circumference and shall be
equally distributed. Transverse reinforcing shall be used and shall extend into the
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
concrete cap. 7 .10 .3-8 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 ≤ 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
2.5
B. Embedment and Concrete Cover
7.10.4-1 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝length,
≥ 2 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′l , 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
The minimum embedment e of the reinforcing cage into the cap shall satisfy:
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
7.10.4-1 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ 2 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 (7.10.4-1)
�𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟′𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2 2𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷

7.10.4-2 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ � 4 + −2 (7.10.4-2)
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2 2𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
7.10.4-2 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ≥ � 4 + −2
Where ψe is a coating factor, which shall be taken
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 as 1.0 for uncoated bars, and �𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 ′
1.2 for epoxy-coated bars.
The reinforcing cage shall extend into the CFST at least a distance of 2ld below
the top of the steel casing, where ld is the development length of the longitudinal
reinforcing as defined in AASHTO.
The concrete cover above headed longitudinal reinforcing shall exceed 3dh, where dh
is the diameter of the head. The concrete side cover adjacent to a head shall exceed
dh. When headed bars are not used, the development of longitudinal reinforcement
into the cap shall be as specified in AASHTO LRFD or AASHTO Seismic, as
appropriate.
C. Pile Cap and/or Cap Beam Reinforcement
The pile cap should follow conventional design practice and must be adequate to
sustain the foundation design loads. Joint reinforcement shall follow the requirements
of the AASHTO Guide Specifications.

July 2019
7.10.5 RCFST-to-Column and CFST-to Column Connections

Direct RCFST-to-column connections shall be designed as fully-restrained connections
capable of resisting all load effects. The recommended RCFST shaft to reinforced concrete
column connection is shown in Figure 7.10.4-1.
All column reinforcement shall be extended into the RCFST shaft for a length greater than
or equal to the length required for noncontact lap splices between columns and shafts.
The contribution of steel casing to the structural resistance of RCFST’s varies from zero
at the end of the tube to fully composite at the end of the transition zone. The transition
zone length may be taken as 1.0D. The use of slip casing in determining the resistance for
RCFST shafts is not permitted.
Figure 7.10.5-1 RCFST-to-Column Connection
COLUMN
RC
LAP SPLICE ZONE
NON-CONTACT
TRANSITION
LIMIT OF TUBE
CONST. JOINT RCFST
TRANSITION
SHAFT
RC
CFST-to column connections do not require additional reinforcement within the shaft.
However, the concrete within the shaft does require testing. A cage may be installed
to support the CSL tubes or thermal integrity wire that is required. A steel ring shall be
welded to the inside of the steel casing 3” below the top of casing to aid in transfer of
FIG. 7.10.5-1
forces from the column reinforcement cage to the steel casing. See Section 7.10.4A for
steel ring requirements.
All column reinforcement shall be extended into the CFST shaft the maximum of 0.5D
(shaft diameter) plus the column reinforcement development length and 1.0D.

July 2019
Figure 7.10.5-2 CFST-to Column Connection
COLUMN
RC
SHEAR RING
ASSUMED LOCATION
OF EFFECTIVE
SHEAR TRANSFER
TRANSITION
COLUMN REINF.
DEV LENGTH
LIMIT OF TUBE
CONST. JOINT
NOMINAL SHAFT
CFST
REINFORCEMENT
TO SUPPORT
CSL TUBES OR
TIP WIRES
BOTTOM OF SHAFT
7.10.6 Partially-filled CFST

FIGURE 7.10.5-2
The use of partially-filled steel tubes for bridge foundations requires the approval of
the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer, and will only be used where conventional CFST
members are grossly uneconomical or unconstructible.
Design zones of partially filled steel piles and shafts are shown in Figure 7.10.5-1.
Longitudinal and transverse reinforcement shall extend to at least the first point of zero
moment along the member under the peak loading condition.
Crosshole sonic log (CSL) testing or thermal integrity profiling (TIP) shall be performed
in accordance with Standard Specifications Section 6-19.3(9). CSL tubes or thermal wires
shall extend to the bottom of concrete.
Corrosion losses shall be considered on each exposed surface of the steel tube.

July 2019
Figure 7.10.6-1 Partially-filled CFST

COLUMN LONGITUDINAL
REINFORCEMENT
TOP OF SHAFT
NON-CONTACT LAP
SPLICE REQUIREMENTS
SHAFT LONGITUDINAL
REINFORCEMENT
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
RCFST DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
BOTTOM OF M = 0
REINFORCEMENT
ACCESS TUBES OR
CFST DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
THERMAL WIRES
BOTTOM OF CONCRETE &

ACCESS TUBES OR
STEEL PIPE PILE THERMAL WIRES
REQUIREMENTS
BOTTOM OF SHAFT
7.10.7 Construction Requirements

For CFSTs with tubes installed open-ended, the insides of the tube shall be excavated
and then cleaned with an appropriate tool to remove all adhering soil and other material.
When excavating, a nominal plug of soil
FIG. shall be left at the bottom of the pile as
7.10.6-1
determined by the Geotechnical Engineer. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be consulted
to determine the method for computing axial compressive and uplift (if applicable)
capacities of the CFSTs during design. In addition, the method for accepting CFSTs
during construction, if installed as a driven pile, will need to be recommended by the
Geotechnical Engineer. When driving an open ended pile, the total resistance obtained
consists of a contribution from end bearing, external side friction, and internal side
friction. Also, depending on the pile diameter and soil conditions, the pile could drive with
or without a soil plug. When excavating the soil from inside of an open-ended driven pile,
the resistance can be altered from the as-driven condition due to loss of internal side
friction. All of these factors need to be considered during the design and shall be based
on recommendations from the Geotechnical Engineer. Open-ended CFSTs installed using
techniques similar to a drilled shaft shall be designed and constructed as a drilled shaft.
Closed-ended CFSTs driven as a pile may be designed and accepted in the field similar to
a closed-ended steel pile.

July 2019
Welding for ASTM A 252 pipe shall conform to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, latest edition,
Structural Welding Code, except that all weld filler metal shall be low hydrogen material
selected from Table 4.1 in AASHTO/AWS D1.5M/D1.5:2010 Bridge Welding Code. All
seams and splices shall be complete penetration welds.
Welding and joint geometry for the seam shall be qualified in accordance with AWS
D1.1/D1.1M, latest edition, Structural Welding Code. The Contractor may submit
documentation of prior qualification to the Engineer to satisfy this requirement.
For the fabrication of helical (spiral) seam submerged-arc welded pipe piles, the maximum
radial offset of strip/plate edges shall be ⅛ inch. The offset shall be transitioned with a
taper weld and the slope shall not be less than a 1-to-2.5 taper. The weld reinforcement
shall not be greater than 3/16 inches and misalignment of weld beads shall not exceed ⅛
inch.
If spirally welded pipe piles are allowed, skelp splices shall be located at least 1′-0″ away
from the annular ring.
Nondestructive evaluation (NDE) requirements for field welded splices shall be identified
on the plans. The location of splices and NDE requirements shall be divided into 3
possible zones as determined by the Engineer:
1. No splices permitted – highly stressed areas
2. Splices permitted with 100 percent UT and visual inspection – moderately
stressed areas
3. Splices permitted with 100 percent visual inspection – low stressed areas
7.10.8 Notation
Ab = area of a single bar for the internal reinforcement (in2)
Abc = area of the internal steel reinforcing in compression (in2)
Abt = area of the internal steel reinforcing in tension (in2)
Ac = net cross-sectional area of the concrete (in2)
Acc = area of concrete effective in compression (in2)
Ag = cross-sectional area of the steel tube (in2)
As = cross-sectional area of the steel tube and the longitudinal internal steel
reinforcement (in2)
Asc = area of the steel tube in compression (in2)
Ast = area of the steel tube in tension (in2)
c = one half the chord length of the tube in compression (in)
cb = one half the chord length of a notional steel ring equivalent to the internal
reinforcement in compression (in)
D = outside diameter of the tube (in.)
Do = outside diameter of the annular ring (in.)
db = nominal diameter of a reinforcing bar (in)
de = minimum edge distance from center of CFST to edge of cap (in)
df = depth of cap (in)
Ec = elastic modulus of concrete (ksi)
EIeff = effective composite flexural cross-sectional stiffness of CFST or RCFST (k-in2)
Es = elastic modulus of steel (ksi)
Fexx = classification strength of weld metal (ksi)
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of steel (ksi)
Fy = specified minimum yield strength of steel (ksi)

July 2019
Fyb = specified minimum yield strength of reinforcing bars used for internal
reinforcement (ksi)
fc’ = minimum specified 28-day compressive strength of concrete (ksi)
f'cf = minimum specified 28-day compressive strength of concrete in a cap or
footing (ksi)
g1 = coefficient for the shear capacity of the steel tube
g2 = coefficient for the effective shear area of steel tube
g3 = coefficient for the effect on concrete strength in shear due to confinement from
the steel tube
g4 = coefficient for bond development between the concrete and steel tube
h = cap depth above the CFST required to resist punching shear in a cap (in)
Ic = uncracked moment of inertial of the concrete about the centroidal axis (in4)
Is = moment of inertia of the steel tube and the longitudinal internal steel
reinforcement about the centroidal axis (in4)
le = Required embedment length for CFST embedded in a concrete cap (in)
M(y) = nominal moment resistance as a function of the parameter y (kip-in)
Mo = plastic moment resistance of members without axial load (kip-in)
n = number of equally spaced longitudinal internal steel reinforcement
P(y) = nominal compressive resistance as function of the parameter y (kips)
Pu = factored axial load acting on member (kip)
Po = compressive resistance of a member without consideration of flexure (kips)
r = radius to the outside of the steel tube (in)
rbm = radius to the center of the internal reinforcing bars (in)
ri = radius to the inside of the steel tube (in)
rm = radius to the center of the steel tube (in)
t = wall thickness of the tube, adjusted for corrosion (in)
tb = wall thickness of a notional steel ring equivalent to the internal reinforcement (in)
t0 = wall thickness of the tube, not adjusted for corrosion (in)
θ = angle used to define c (rad)
θb = angle used to define cb (rad). θb shall be taken as π/2 if y/rb is greater than 1 and
θb shall be taken as –π/2 if y/rb is less than -1.

July 2019
7.11 Bridge Standard Drawings

7.3-A1-1 Column Silo Cover
7.8-A1-1 Typical Shaft Details

July 2019
7.12 Appendices
Appendix 7.3-A2 Noncontact Lap Splice Length Column to Shaft Connections
Appendix 7-B1 Linear Spring Calculation Method II (Technique I)
Appendix 7-B2 Pile Footing Matrix Example Method II (Technique I)
Appendix 7-B3 Non-Linear Springs Method III

July 2019
Appendix 7.3-A2 Noncontact Lap Splice

Noncontact LapLength
Splice Length
Appendix 7.4-A1 Column to Column
Shaft Connections
to Shaft Connections
Column Longitudinal Bar Size
Column Shaft #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #14 #18
Diameter Diameter Basic Lap Splice Length, Ls (in)
(ft) (ft) 36.7 42.8 49.0 55.2 62.2 69.0 82.9 110.5
Minimum Noncontact Lap Splice Length, Lns = Ls + s
5.5 * 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-6" 11'-0"
6.0 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 9'-0" 11'-0"
3'-0" 6.5 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-0" 11'-6"
7.0 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-6" 11'-6"
8.0 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 10'-0" 12'-0"
6.0 * 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-6" 11'-0"
6.5 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 9'-0" 11'-0"
3'-6" 7.0 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-0" 11'-6"
8.0 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-6" 12'-0"
9.0 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-0" 10'-0" 12'-6"
6.5 * 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-6" 11'-0"
7.0 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 9'-0" 11'-0"
4'-0" 8.0 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-6" 11'-6"
9.0 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 10'-0" 12'-0"
9.5 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-0" 10'-0" 12'-6"
7.0 * 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-6" 11'-0"
8.0 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-0" 11'-6"
4'-6" 9.0 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-6" 12'-0"
9.5 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 10'-0" 12'-0"
10.0 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-0" 10'-0" 12'-6"
8.0 * 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 9'-0" 11'-0"
9.0 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-6" 11'-6"
5'-0" 9.5 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-6" 12'-0"
10.0 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 10'-0" 12'-0"
11.0 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-0" 10'-6" 12'-6"
8.0 * 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-6" 11'-0"
9.0 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-0" 11'-6"
5'-6" 9.5 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-6" 11'-6"
10.0 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-6" 12'-0"
11.0 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-0" 10'-0" 12'-6"
9.0 * 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 9'-0" 11'-0"
9.5 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-0" 11'-6"
6'-0" 10.0 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-6" 11'-6"
11.0 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 10'-0" 12'-0"
12.0 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-0" 10'-6" 12'-6"
(Continued on following page)

July 2019
Noncontact Lap Splice Length

Appendix 7.4-A1 Column to Shaft Connections
Column Longitudinal Bar Size
Column Shaft #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #14 #18
Diameter Diameter Basic Lap Splice Length, Ls (in)
(ft) (ft) 36.7 42.8 49.0 55.2 62.2 69.0 82.9 110.5
Minimum Noncontact Lap Splice Length, Lns = Ls + s
9.0 * 4'-0" 4'-6" 5'-0" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-0" 10'-6"
9.5 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-6" 10'-6"
6'-6" 10.0 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-6" 11'-0"
11.0 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-0" 11'-6"
12.0 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-6" 8'-0" 8'-6" 9'-6" 12'-0"
9.5 * 4'-0" 4'-6" 5'-0" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-0" 10'-6"
10.0 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-6" 10'-6"
7'-0"
11.0 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 9'-0" 11'-0"
12.0 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-6" 11'-6"
10.0 * 4'-0" 4'-6" 5'-0" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-0" 10'-6"
7'-6" 11.0 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-6" 11'-0"
12.0 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-0" 9'-0" 11'-6"
11.0 * 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-6" 10'-6"
8'-0"
12.0 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 9'-0" 11'-0"
11.0 * 4'-0" 4'-6" 5'-0" 6'-0" 6'-6" 7'-0" 8'-0" 10'-6"
8'-6"
12.0 4'-6" 5'-0" 5'-6" 6'-6" 7'-0" 7'-6" 8'-6" 11'-0"
Notes:
1. All values based on normal weight concrete with f'c = 4.0 ksi.
2. The basic splice length, Ls , is based on 1.7 times the tension development length Ld. Ld is calculated per
Section 5.11.2.1.1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 7th Edition, 2015 Interim Revisions. The
1.7 (Class C lap splice) factor was maintained for the basic splice length calculations to be consistent with the
original TRAC research for noncontact lap splices. This table does not apply when column longitudinal bars are
bundled.
3. Development lengths are based on uncoated deformed bars. For epoxy coated bars add 0.2*Ls or 0.5*Ls to Lns
depending on column bar spacing and clear cover. See AASHTO 5.11.2.1.2 for spacing and cover requirements.
4. The clearance between the column and shaft reinforcement, s, is based on an out-to-out dimension of the
cages. Concrete cover to the column reinforcing is 2", and concrete cover to the shaft reinforcing is per Std.
Spec. 6-19.3(5)C. Also, s has been increased by the allowable shaft construction tolerances in Std. Spec. 6-
19.3(1)A. If an oversized cage is used in conjunction with an oversize casing, s may need to be increased further.
5. The reinforcement confinement factor, λrc, is assumed to be 0.4 for all cases and is based on the assumption
that the column reinforcement is well confined with column transverse reinforcement, shaft transverse
reinforcement, and in most cases a permanent shaft casing.
6. All noncontact splice lengths have been rounded up to the nearest 6".
* Minimum common shaft diameter for specified column diameter to meet minimum clearance and
construction tolerances.

July 2019
Appendix 7-B1 Linear Spring Calculation Method II
(Technique I)
Method II (Technique I) - Matrix Coefficient Definitions

The stiffness matrix containing the spring values and using the standard coordinate
system is shown in Figure 7-B1-1. The sign of all the terms must be determined based on
the sign convention.
Figure 7-B1-1 Global Coordinate System
Py
My
Longit udinal Mx
Vx
Mz
Vz
Figure 7-B1-2 Standard Global Matrix
⎧ Vx Py Vz Mx My Mz ⎫ ⎧ Disp.⎫ ⎧ Force⎫
⎪ Vx K11 0 0 0 0 K16 ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ Δx ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ Vx ⎪⎪
⎪
⎪ Py 0 K 22 0 0 0 0 ⎪ ⎪ Δy ⎪ ⎪ Py ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎨ Vz 0 0 K 33 K 34 0 0 ⎬ × ⎨ Δz ⎬ = ⎨ Vz ⎬
⎪Mx 0 0 K 43 K 44 0 0 ⎪ ⎪ θx ⎪ ⎪ Mx ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎪My 0 0 0 0 K 55 0 ⎪ ⎪ θy ⎪ ⎪ My ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎩ Mz K 61 0 0 0 0 K 66⎭ ⎩ θz ⎭ ⎩ Mz ⎭
Where the linear spring constants or K values are defined as follows using the Global
Coordinates:
K11 = +Vx(app)/+Δx = Longitudinal Lateral Stiffness (kip/in)
K22 = AE/L = Vertical or Axial Stiffness (k/in)
K33 = -Vz(app)/-Δz = Transverse Lateral Stiffness (k/in)
K44 = +Mx(app)/+θx = Transverse Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K55 = JG/L = Torsional Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K66 = +Mz(app)/+θz = Longitudinal Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K34 = -Vz(ind)/+θx = Transverse Lateral Cross-couple term (kip/rad)
K16 = +Vx(ind) /+θz = Longitudinal Lateral Cross-couple term (kip/rad)
K43 = +Mx(ind)/-Δz = Transverse Moment Cross-couple term (kip-in/in)
K61 = +Mz(ind)/+Δx = Longitudinal Moment Cross-couple term (kip-in/in)

July 2019
Fixed Head vs. Free Head Spring Calculations

Fixed Head
If the shear and moment are creating deflection in OPPOSING directions where the
spring is located, a fixed head boundary condition is required to model the loaded
foundation in a finite element model. See Figure 7-B1-3 for the fixed head coordinate
system assumed in the following spring calculations.
Since applying load to a fixed end results in no reaction, a soil/structure interaction
analysis will generally analyze the shear and moment simultaneously as a free head.
Using the soil response results, a cross-couple correction term will be required in a FEM
to produce the induced moment in the element modeling the fixed head condition. If
accurate stresses in fixed head element are not required, the cross-couple term may
be omitted.
There are two ways to model fixed head pile group. The most common method for a
column footing is to use a group spring to model a group of piles or shafts as one set of
springs. This method uses six linear springs to represent the foundation behavior. Lateral
loads resisted by Cross-couples terms do not apply and individual pile loads must be
calculated from the FEM results.
The second method would be to model the individual piles. This is more helpful for
analyzing local stresses in the foundation cap element and for each pile. Cross-couple
terms may be included and individual pile loads are generated in the FEM.
Figure 7-B1-3 Fixed Head Coordinate System

Y Y
+ x - z
)
nd
z( i
+M )
pp
pp
) (a
+ Mz( app) +Mz ( i nd) Vz
Mx( a -
+ d)
Long. + Vx( i nd) + Vx( app)
z ( in
X - V X
s.
an
Tr
Z Z
+ Oz r ot . +Ox r ot .
LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
SPRINGS SPRINGS
Free Head
If the shear and moment are creating deflection in the SAME direction where the spring
is located, a free head boundary condition is required to model the loaded foundation in a
finite element model. If a free head boundary condition is assumed Method II (Technique
II) described in Section 7.2.5.

July 2019
Method II (Technique I)
que I) - Matrix Coefficient

Vertical Definitions
Springs (K22)
ee Head Spring Calculations
Vertical spring constants can be calculated from the following three assumptions. See
K22) Figure 7-B1-4 and the following 7 .2 .3-1 definitions. ��
REF: � � ��
� �Seismic �� of
Design �� 1��Bridges
� Highway ��
Workshop
nstants can be calculated from Pub. No. FHWA-IP-81-2,
Manual, three
the 7 .2 .3-1
following See Jan 1981.
�� assumptions.
��
7 .3 .6-1 � 1�� 1 �
� � �� 3 ��
��
d the following definitions. REF: Page 6-30, Seismic Design of �
Workshop Manual, Pub. No. Figure 7-B1-4

FHWA-IP-81-2, Pile
Jan
7 .2 .3-1 �� Stress
�1981.
�� 1 �� 1��
7 .3 .6-1 � � �� 3 ��
� � �
7 .4 .6-1 � � � �� A � ��
= � �Cross-sectional area (in²)
1 �
tional area (in²) 7 .3 .6-1 ��
��
E = �Young’s modulus (ksi)
��3��
7 .4 .6-1 ��
L �= � Length of pile (in)
��
modulus (ksi) �� 7 .4 .6-2 � �
��
�� F ��= � Fraction
� of pile embedded
� � ��
7 .4 .6-1 �� 7 .2 .3-1 �� 1��
��
7 .4 .6-2 ��
pile (in) � � �
�� 7 .4 .7-1
�� 1��3��
� � ��
�
7 .3 .6-1
7 .4 .6-2 ��
f pile embedded 7 .4 .7-1 ��
��
��7 .8 .1-1
��
��
��
�
��
��
7 .4 .6-1 � � �
es: 7 .4 .7-1
7 .8 .1-1 ��
��
��
��
7 .8 .2-1 ��
��
7 .8 .1-1 � � Stress
��
��
��
7 .4 .6-2 ��
7 .8 .2-1 �Pile
��
�
�� 7 .9 .2-1 ��
� � ��
�
Point Bearing Piles:
Figure 7-B-1.e ��
��
7 .8 .2-1 � �
7 .9 .2-1 �� 7 .4 .7-1
��
��
��
� ��
� � ��
inearly varying skin friction: 7-B-1 .1
��
�
E 7 .9 .2-1 ��
��AE � �7 .8 .1-1
��
Friction 7-B-1 .1
� ��
, with F = 1.0 (fully embedded), K 22
Piles = 3linearly
with �varying skin
7-B-1 .2friction:
�� 1�� 3
��
F⎞ L ��
⎟L 7-B-1 .1 ��
�
��
⎠ 7-B-1 .2 �� 7 .8 .2-1 ��
� �� 1�� 3
��
��
�
��7-B-1 .3 �� 1��
��
��
��
constant skin friction: 7-B-1 .2 �� 1�� 3
Friction 7-B-1 .3
Piles with ��
constant 7 .9 .2-1
��
��
��
skin ��
�� friction: ��
AE� �� 1��
�
� � ��
, with F = 1.0, (fully embedded), K 22 = 2 �� 7-B-1 .4 ��
⎞ 7-B-1 .3 �� L � 7-B-1 .1 � �� 1��
⎟L 7-B-1 .4 ��
�
�
��
�
� ��
⎠ � � �
7-B-1 .5A �11
��
��
�7-B-1 .2
� ��
∆� � � 1�� 3
Torsional Springs 7-B-1 .4 ��
(K55) �11 � ��
��
��
(K55) 7-B-1 .5A
∆�
� �
� ��
7-B-1 .5B �33 �� piles ��
In general,
ogram calculates acceptable torsional torsional
spring spring
values for
� constants
shafts
7-B-1 .3
�� and for
�� individual
� � �∆� are based on the mechanics of
�� 1��
��
7-B-1 .5A �11 � ��
the pile.
oundation springs. In general, The equation
torsional spring
7-B-1 .5B for
� torsional
constants
�33 ∆�
for stiffness��
�� is �given
�� below. �
�∆� � ��
e based on the strength of the pile. The statics equation ��for 7-B-1 .6A
torsional ��
�
� �
��
�
��
n below. 7-B-1 .5B �33 � 7-B-1 .4
��
��
7-B-1 .6A �� ∆� ��
��
��
Where:G = 0.4E 7-B-1 .6B ��
��
T JG 7-B-1 .6A
= 0.4E ��
G J =7-B-1 .6B
�� 7-B-1 .5A
��
�11 � ��
= where, Torsional Moment
� �of � Inertia
�� ∆�
φ L J 7-B-1 .7 �� 11 � ∆� � �1� � �� 1 � ∆� � ��
= Torsional moment��of inertia
L = Length of Pile ��
L 7-B-1 .6B
= Length�� 7-B-1 .5B
of pile ��
�33 � ��
7-B-1 .7 �� 11 ��∆� � �7-B-1 .8
�1� � ��
�� ∆ � �� 1
�33 ∆� �� 3�
∆� �� 3 � ∆� � ��
��
11 & K33)
7-B-1 .7 ��
� �33
�11 ��
7-B-1 .8 �� ∆∆��
7-B-1 .6A ��3�
�1�
��
7-B-1 .9
��
� ��
�1� �
� �� 3
��1 �� ∆∆��
��
��
��
��
��
7-B-1 .8 �1�
7-B-1 .9 ��
�33 � ∆� ��
�� 3� � �� 3 � ∆� � ��
��
��
7-B-1 .6B
��
7-B-1 .10 �3��
��
��
7-B-1 .9 �1� � ��
��
7-B-1 .10 �3� � 7-B-1 .7
�� 11 � ∆� � �1� � �� 1 � ∆� � ��
��
7-B-1 .10 �3� � 7-B-1 .8
��
�� 33 � ∆� � �3� � �� 3 � ∆� � ��
��
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 �� Page 7-121

July 2019 7-B-1 .9 �1� � ��
��
��
��
7-B-1 .1 ��
7 .8 .1-1 � ��
� ��
��
� �� 7 .8 .2-1
7-B-1 .2 ��
�� 1��
� ��
��
�
Chapter 7 ��
�� Substructure Design
7 .8 .2-1
7-B-1 .2 �� 7 .9 .2-1
�� 1��
��
��
� ��
3 � ��
�� 7-B-1 .3 ��
� 1��
Lateral Springs (K11 & K33) � ��
��
�
7 .9 .2-1 �� 7-B-1 .1 ��

� ��
A fixed head lateral
7-B-1 .3 �� spring can
� �� be �found
� 1�� by applying
�� the �
shear
��
��
��and
��
�axial
�� load in a
7 .2 .3-1 �� 7-B-1 .4 ��
� �� 1��
��
soil response program �� with the rotation at the top equal to ��zero and finding the
7-B-1 .17 .2 .3-1
�� 7-B-1 .2
� � ��is�� 1��
lateral deflection that��
�� The spring
results. � value 1��applied
the ��
��
� shear divided by the
��
7-B-1 .47 .3 .6-1
�� 1
��
��
7-B-1 .5A �11��
� ��
resulting deflection. �� 3 ∆�
�� 3 ��
7-B-1 .27 .3 .6-1
�� 1�3��
� �� 1��
��7-B-1 .3
��
��
��
� � � �� 1��
��
��
��
� ��
7-B-1 .5A �11 �
7 .4 .6-1 � ∆� ��
� 7-B-1 .5B
�33 � � ��
� � ��
� �� ∆�
��
7-B-1 .37 .4 .6-1
��
� �� 1��7-B-1 .4 � ��
��
� ��
��
Rotational Springs (K44
7-B-1 .5B &
�33 ��
7 .4 .6-2
K66)
��
��
�
��
��
�
� �
�
7-B-1 .6A ��
��
�∆ �
��
� � �
Ideally a fixed
7-B-1 .4 head
7 .4 .6-2
�� boundary
�
� �
�
�
�� condition
� �� would result in no
��
7-B-1 .5A �11 � ��rotation.
�� Therefore K44 and
��
�
��
K667-B-1 .6A
would be�� infinitely
�� stiff.��
��
� �
�
��
��
� 7-B-1 .6B
�
� �� ∆ ��
� ��
7 .4 .7-1 ��
In the past, the fixed head rotational
�� springs where found
� by applying
�� the moment and
7-B-1 .5A �11
7 .4 .7-1 � ��
∆�� 7-B-1 .5B
� �� 7-B-1 .7
�33
� � �11
��
�∆��∆� � �1� � �� 1 � ∆� � ��
axial7-B-1 .6B
load in a soil
�� response
� �� program
� ��
7 .8 .1-1 � �� with the translation
� at the top equal to zero and
finding the rotation that ��results. The spring value is the applied� moment divided by the
7-B-1 .5B7 .8 .1-1
�33 � � � �� 7-B-1 .8 ��
�� 7-B-1 .6A
�� 33��
� ∆� ��
� �3� � �� 3 � ∆� � ��
resulting rotation.
7-B-1 .77 .8 .2-1
�� 11�� ∆� � �1� � �� 1 � ∆� ��
�∆ ��
��
��
7-B-1 .87 .8 .2-1 ��
�
�� 33��
��
∆� ��
��3� 7-B-1 .9
� �� 1� ��∆��
��
��3 ��
7-B-1 .6A �� 7-B-1 .6B
� � ��
� ��
7 .9 .2-1 ��
��
7 .9 .2-1
7-B-1 .9 �1� �� 7-B-1 .7
��
7-B-1 .10
� �� 3�
�� ∆��
��
Cross-Couple7-B-1 .6B
Springs ��(K16,
7-B-1 .1 ��K34,
� �� K43 &��
� �� K61) � � �11 �
��
� � �1� � �� 1 � ∆� � ��
��
��
Fixed Head 7-B-1 .1
7-B-1 .10 ��3�
��
��
� � ∆ �� 7-B-1 .8 �� 33 � ∆� � �3� � �� 3 � ∆� � ��
7-B-1 .7 � � �11
7-B-1 .2 ��
� �� 1
� �1� ��
� � ∆��
� �� 1�� 3
Cross-couple springs will not ��be
�� symmetric
�� for non-linear� modeling foundation
�� modeling.
�
7-B-1 .87-B-1 .2 �� 7-B-1 .9

�� 1�� 1� �
��
�� 3
Since finite element
�� 33programs
� ∆� �� will
�� use
�3� �� matrix
�� multiplication
��3 � ∆� ��to generate
� �� reactions,
� doing
��
the math is7-B-1 .3
the easy ��
way � to show� �the
��effect of cross-couple
� � 1�� terms. ��
�� Note�that
� K16 and
�
��
K34 terms7-B-1 .3
7-B-1 .9 will
�1�have
� opposite signs.
��
��
�� 7-B-1 .10 �3� � ��
� �� 1��
��
��
�
��
� � � ��
7-B-1 .4
⎧ Vx�� Vz � Mx
Py My Mz ⎫ ⎧ Disp.⎫ ⎧ Force⎫
��
7-B-1 .10⎪ �3� � ��
K16 ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ Δx ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ Vx ⎪⎪
� � ��
7-B-1 .4 �� 0
� � �0 � 0
⎪ Vx K11 0
�
��
� � �
7-B-1 .5A
⎪ Py 0 �11K� 22 ∆� 0 ��
0 0 0 ⎪ ⎪ Δy ⎪ ⎪ Py ⎪
⎪
7-B-1 .5A
�� ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎨ Vz 0 �11 0� ��
∆K�
33��
K 34 0 0 ⎬ × ⎨ Δz ⎬ = ⎨ Vz ⎬
7-B-1 .5B
⎪Mx �33 � ��
0 0 � �∆K� 43 K 44 0 0 ⎪ ⎪ θx ⎪ ⎪ Mx ⎪
⎪ �� ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
7-B-1 .5B
⎪My 0 �33 0� ��∆ ��
K 55 0 ⎪ ⎪ θy ⎪ ⎪ My ⎪
�0
��
0
7-B-1 .6A
⎪ �� ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎩ Mz K 61 0 ��
�� 0 0 0 K 66⎭ ⎩ θz ⎭ ⎩ Mz ⎭
7-B-1 .6A ��
��
�
7-B-1 .6B
The longitudinal �� are:
reactions ��
��
��
7-B-1 .6B ��
7-B-1 .7 �� 11 ��∆
�
� � �1� � �� 1 � ∆� � ��
The transverse reactions

7-B-1 .7 � � are:
�11 � ∆ � �1� � � �� 1 � ∆ � ��
7-B-1 .8 �� 33 � ∆�� 3� � �� 3 � ∆��
7-B-1 .8 �� 33 � ∆� � �3� � �� 3 � ∆� � ��
��
7-B-1 .9 �1� � ��
For a true fixed head boundary ��
condition (translation only) in the X and Z directions, there
��
7-B-1 .9 about
will be no rotation �1� �the��
X ��
�� and Z axis. θx and θz will be zero (or approach zero). This
means the7-B-1 .10 �3� cross-couple
K34 and K16 �
��
��
terms will not affect the shear reactions. Likewise,
��
the K66 and K44 rotational
7-B-1 .10 �3� � terms ��
zero out and do not affect the moment reaction. This
��
leaves the K61 and K43 cross-couple terms to generate induced moments based on the
deflections in the X and Z directions. Designers should note, the cross-couple moments

July 2019
�
��
7-B-1 .2 �� 1�� 3
��
7-B-1 .3 ��
Substructure Design ��
��
�� 1��
Chapter 7 ��
� ��
�
are applied
7-B-1 .3to ��
a fixed
� footing
�� element
� �� and��
� � 1�� are resisted axially
� �by the
�� piles.
�� This affects
� 7-B-1 .4 ��
��
the local stress in the footing
��
�
�� and axial loading of the pile�much� more� than the column
moment and shear, which is usually the primary focus for design. ��
� � ��
7-B-1 .4 �� 7-B-1 .5A �11 � ��
K11 and K66 (or K33 and K44) alone do not predict the shape
� � � ∆� or reaction of the
foundation element. The cross-couple
��
term K16 (or K34)�will add a shear force to correct
��
7-B-1 .5A �11 �
the applied moment deflection. 7-B-1 .5B �33 �
��
∆� �∆�
Modeling real life features

��may be somewhat different than the theoretically true fixed
��
7-B-1 .5B
condition. �33 of
The top � a column ��
at the 7-B-1 .6A ��
superstructure �
or some ��
�∆� �� pile and shaft applications
may have opposing shear and moment, however the moment may be much less than the
��
theoretical induced
7-B-1 .6A �� free head��
moment value. In other
7-B-1 .6B �� words,
� there may be significant
��
��
rotations that need to be accounted for in the spring modeling. Designers need to be
aware of this situation��and use engineering
�� judgment.
7-B-1 .7 �� The
�11 FEM
� ∆� �would
�1� � have rotations
�� 1 � ∆� � ��
7-B-1 .6B ��
about the X and Z axis. θx� and θz will NOT be zero and both the cross-couples terms and
�
rotational springs may significantly affect the analysis.
7-B-1 .8 �� 33 � ∆� � �3� � �� 3 � ∆� � ��
7-B-1 .7 �� 11 � ∆� � �1� � �� 1 � ∆� � ��
The spring value for the lateral cross-couple term is the induced
�� shear divided by the
7-B-1 .8
associated rotation.
� � �33 � ∆ � �3� � � 7-B-1 .9
�� 1�
��3 �
� ∆ � ��
� ��
� � � � � ��
��
7-B-1 .9 �1� � 7-B-1 .10
�� 3� � ��
��
The spring value for the moment cross-couple term is theெೣሺ೔೙೏ሻ

�� induced shear divided by the
7-B-1 .10 �3� �
associated rotation. 7-B-1 .11 ‫ܭ‬͸ͳ ൌ
�� ሺ݈‫݈ܽ݊݅݀ݑݐ݅݃݊݋‬ሻ
�� ିο೥
ெೣሺ೔೙೏ሻ ெ೥ሺ೔೙೏ሻ
7-B-1 .11 ‫ܭ‬͸ͳ ൌ 7-B-1 .12
ሺ݈‫݈ܽ݊݅݀ݑݐ݅݃݊݋‬ሻ ‫ܭ‬Ͷ͵ ൌ ሺ‫݁ݏݎ݁ݒݏ݊ܽݎݐ‬ሻ
ିο೥ ିοೣ
ெ೥ሺ೔೙೏ሻ
7-B-1 .12 ‫ܭ‬Ͷ͵ ൌ ሺ‫݁ݏݎ݁ݒݏ݊ܽݎݐ‬ሻ
ିοೣ

July 2019
Appendix 7-B-3 Pile Footing Matrix Example
Appendix 7-B2 Pile Footing Matrix Example Method II Method II (Technique I)
(Technique
Method II (Technique I) Matrix Example
I) – Pile Footing
A matrix with cross-couple terms is a valid method to model pile supported footings.
Method II (Technique I) – Pile
The analysis assumes Footing
the piles Matrix
will behave similarExample
to a column fixed at the bottom (in
the soil) with lateral translation only at the top (no rotation). This requires Fixed
AHead
matrix with cross-couple
Boundary Condition toterms is a spring
calculate valid method
values. to model pile supported footings. The
analysis assumes the piles will behave similar to a column fixed at the bottom (in the soil)
The lateral
with Lpile program will only
translation solveatforthe
non-linear
top (no soil resultsThis
rotation). for individual piles.head
requires fixed See boundary
Group Effects in BDM section 7.2.5 to reduce the soil properties of a pile in a group
conditions to calculate spring values.
in both the transverse and longitudinal directions. This sample matrix calculates a
The LPILE program
foundation spring forwill
an solve for non-linear
individual pile. soil results for individual piles. See group
effects in Section 7.2.5 to reduce the soil properties
If a pile group has a large number of piles, the GPILE computer of a pile program
in a group in both the
is available
transverse
to generateand longitudinal
a spring matrix for directions.
the group.ThisThe sample
programmatrix calculates
also computes a foundation
individual pile spring
for an individual
loads pile. from input loads. The output will contain a SEISAB {6 x 6}
and deflections
stiffness matrix. GTStrudl or SAP matrices have the same coefficients with a
The pile spring requires eight pile stiffness terms for a matrix as discussed in
different axis orientation for the pile group.
Appendix 7-B1. The following sample calculations discuss the lateral, longitudinal, and
The pile spring
cross-couple requires
spring eight pilefor
coefficients stiffness terms for
a GTStrudl a matrix
local as discussed
coordinate system.inSee BDMAppendix
Appendix 7-B-1. The following
7-B1 for axial and torsion springs. sample calculations discuss the lateral, longitudinal,
and cross-couple spring coefficients for a GTStrudl local coordinate system. See
The maximum
Appendix FEM
7-B-1 transverse
for axial and longitudinal
and torsion springs. seismic loads (Vy, Mz, Vz, My and axial Px)
provide two loads cases for analysis in LPILE.
The maximum FEM transverse and longitudinal seismic The LPILE results
loads (Vy, of these
Mz, Vz, Mytwoand
load cases
will
axialbePx)
used to calculate
provide two loads lateral,
caseslongitudinal,
for analysis inand cross-couple
Lpile. The Lpile spring coefficients.
results of these two
loadsample
This cases will be used toassumes
calculation calculatethere
lateral, longitudinal, and cross-couple
Figure 7-B2-1 Localspring
Axis Coordinate
coefficients.
are no group effects. Only the longitudinal System
direction will calculation
This sample be calculated,
assumesthe transverse
there are Y
no groupwill
direction effects. Only the
be similar. longitudinal
A standard global GLOBAL AXIS
direction will be calculated, the
coordinate system is assumed for the transverse
Longi t udi nal X
direction
bridge. will
This be similar.
sample A standard
will assume a different
global
local coordinate
axis coordinate system is assumed
system to inputfor Z
the bridge. This sample will also assume a
matrix terms, as shown in Figure 7-B2-1.
GTStrudl element is used to provide the Px Local Axi s
When the coordinate
foundation spring, whichsystem changes,
requires a
the sign convention of shear and moment Mat r i x Locat i on
different local axis coordinate system to My Mx
Gr ound Li ne
also will
input change.
matrix This
terms, as will
shownbe inexpressed
Figure 7-in Vy
aB-3.a.
6×6 matrix
Whenby thechanging
coordinate the location of
system End
Vz Mz St r udl Shaf t El ement
the spring values and in sign of any cross-
changes, the sign convention of shear and
St ar t
moment
couple also will change. This will be
terms.
expressed in a 6x6 matrix by changing the
The locations
location of theofspring
matrix terms
values andare
in shown
sign of in Figure 7-B1-2. The displacements are local
and
anythis requires the
cross-couple spring coefficients to be moved to produce the correct local
terms.
reactions. The X axis is the new vertical direction. The Y axis is the new longitudinal
direction. The spring coefficient definitions and notation remains the same as defined in
Appendix 7-B1. Note the shift in diagonal terms and locations of the cross-couple terms.

July 2019
Figure 7-B2-2 Matrix in Local Coordinate System

⎧ Px Vy Vz Mx My Mz ⎫ ⎧Disp.⎫ ⎧Force⎫
⎪ Px K 22
⎪ 0 0 0 0 0 ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ Δx ⎪⎪ ⎪⎪ Px ⎪⎪
⎪ Vy 0 K11 0 0 0 K16 ⎪ ⎪ Δy ⎪ ⎪ Vy ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎨ Vz 0 0 K33 0 K34 0 ⎬ × ⎨ Δz ⎬ ≡ ⎨ Vz ⎬
⎪Mx 0 0 0 K55 0 0 ⎪ ⎪ θx ⎪ ⎪ Mx ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎪My 0 0 K 43 0 K 44 0 ⎪ ⎪ θy ⎪ ⎪ My ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎩ Mz 0 K 61 0 0 0 K 66⎭ ⎩ θz ⎭ ⎩ Mz ⎭
Where the linear spring constants or K values are defined as follows (see Figure 7-B2-3 for
direction and sign convention):
K11 = -Vy(app)/-Δy = Longitudinal Lateral Stiffness (kip/in)
K22 = AE/L = Vertical or Axial Stiffness (k/in)
K33 = -Vz(app)/-Δz = Transverse Lateral Stiffness (k/in)
K44 = -My(app)/-θy = Transverse Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K55 = JG/L = Torsional Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K66 = Mz(app)/θz = Longitudinal Bending or Moment Stiffness (kip-in/rad)
K34 = -Vz(ind)/-θy = Transverse Lateral Cross-couple term (kip/rad)
K16 = -Vy(ind)/+θz = Longitudinal Lateral Cross-couple term (kip/rad)
K43 = -My(ind)/-Δz = Longitudinal Moment Cross-couple term (kip-in/in)
K61 = +Mz(ind)/-Δy = Transverse Moment Cross-couple term (kip-in/in)
Figure 7-B2-3 Local Coordinate System Sign Conventions

X X
y - z
)
i nd
y(
-M )
pp
+ Mz( app) +Mz( i nd) pp
) z( a
a -V
y(
-M d)
-Vy( i nd) -Vy( app) Long. ( in
Y Y - Vz
s.
an
Tr
Z Z
+Oz r ot . -Oy r ot .
LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
SPRINGS SPRINGS
Results from the local coordinate system

Px = 50,000 lbs (axial load)
Vy = -60,000 lbs (shear along longitudinal axis)
Vz = -40,000 lbs (shear along transverse axis)
My = -2,230,000 lb-in (moment about longitudinal axis)
Mz = 3,350,000 lb-in (moment about transverse axis)

July 2019
Load Case 1 - Longitudinal Direction

Load Case 1 applies the lateral load (Vy) and axial load (Px), and restrains the top against
rotation (slope = 0 rad).
Input to LPILE:
Boundary condition code = 2
Lateral load at the pile head = -60000.000 lbs
Slope at the pile head = 0.000 in/in
Axial load at the pile head = 50000.000 lbs
Output from LPILE:
X Deflection Moment Shear Slope
(in) Δy (in) Mz(ind) (lbs-in) Vy(app) (lbs) (Rad.)
0.000 -0.13576 3.761E+06 -60000.000 0.000000
Load Case 2 - Longitudinal Direction

Load case 2 applies the moment load (Mz) and axial load (Px), and restrains the top
against deflection (deflection = 0 rad).
Input to LPILE:
Boundary condition code = 4
Deflection at the pile head = 0.000 in
Moment at the pile head = 3.350E+06 in-lbs
Axial load at the pile head = 50000.000 lbs
Output from LPILE:
X Deflection Moment Shear Slope
(in) (in) Mz(ind) (lbs-in) Vy(ind) (lbs) θz (Rad.)
0.000 0.00000 3.350E+06 -33027.667 0.001192
Springs Constants – Longitudinal Direction

K11 = -Vy(app)/-Δy = -60 kip/-0.13576 in = 442 kip/in
K66 = Mz(app)/θz = 3,350 kip-in/0.001192 rad = 2,810,403 kip-in/rad
K16 = -Vy(ind)/+θz = -33 kip/0.001192 rad = -27,685 kip/rad
K61 = +Mz(ind)/-Δy = 3,761 kip-in/-0.13576 in = -27,703 kip-in/in
⎧ Px Vy Vz Mx My Mz ⎫
⎪ Px K 22 0 0 0 0 0 ⎪ ⎧Disp.⎫ ⎧Force⎫
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
kip kip ⎪ ⎪ Δx ⎪ ⎪ Px ⎪
⎪ Vy 0 442 0 0 0 − 27,685 ⎪
⎪ in rad ⎪ ⎪ Δy ⎪ ⎪ Vy ⎪
⎪ Vz 0 0 K33 0 K34 0 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎨ ⎬ × ⎨ Δz ⎬ ≡ ⎨ Vz ⎬
⎪Mx 0 0 0 K55 0 0 ⎪ ⎪ θx ⎪ ⎪ Mx ⎪
⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎪My 0 0 K 43 0 K 44 0 ⎪ ⎪ θy ⎪ ⎪ My ⎪
⎪ kip − in kip − in ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪
⎪⎩ Mz 0 − 27,703 0 0 0 2,810,403 ⎪ ⎩ θz ⎭ ⎩ Mz ⎭
in rad ⎭

July 2019
Appendix 7-B2 Non-Linear Springs Method I
Appendix 7-B3 Non-Linear Springs Method III
Method III – Non-Linear Springs
A finite element model may use non-linear springs based on PY curves to represent
Method III – Non-Linear Springs foundation response as shown in PY curves graph the relationship between the lateral
soil resistance andFigure
A finite element model may use non-linear the associated
7-B3-1 deflection of the Model
Pile UsingPastands for a
soil. Generally,
force per unit length (of pile) such as kips per inch. Y is the corresponding horizontal
springs based on PY curves to represent Set of Non-linear
deflection (of pile) in units such as inches.
foundation response as shown in PY curves PY Curves
graph the relationship between the lateral soil
resistance and the associated deflection of the
soil. Generally, P stands for a force per unit
length (of pile) such as kips per inch. Y is the
corresponding horizontal deflection (of pile) in
units such as inches.
Node placement for springs should attempt to
imitate the soil layers. Generally, the upper ⅓
Pile Model Using a Set of Non-linear PY Curves
of the pile in stiff soils has the most significant contribution to the lateral
Figure soil reaction.
7-B2-1
Springs in this region should be spaced at most 3 feet apart. Spacing of 2.5 feet has
Node placement for springs should attempt to imitate the soil layers. Generally, the
demonstrated results within 10% of upper ⅓ ofoutput
LPILE moment
the pile in stiff soilsand shear.
has the most significant contribution to the lateral
soil reaction. Springs in this region should be spaced at most 3 feet apart. Spacing
Springs for the lower ⅔ of the pile can
of 2.5transition to a much
feet has demonstrated larger
results spacing.
within Stiff output moment and shear.
10% of Lpile
foundations in weak soils will transfer loads
Springs much
for the lowerdeeper
⅔ of thein the
pile cansoil and more
transition springs
to a much larger spacing. Stiff
would be sensible. foundations in weak soils will transfer loads much deeper in the soil and more springs
would be sensible.
Transverse and longitudinal springsTransverse
must include group reduction factors to analyze the
and longitudinal springs must include group reduction factors to analyze
structure/soil response. Soil properties are modified
the structure/soil in LPILE
response. to account
Soil properties for lateral
are modified group
in Lpile to account for Group
effects. LPILE then generates PY curves
Effects.based ongenerates
Lpile then the modified soil
PY curves properties
based and desired
on the modified soil properties and
depths. See Section 7.2.5 for groupdesired depths. See Section 7.2.5 for Group Effects.
effects.
FEM programs will accept non-linear springs in a Force (F) vs. Deflection (L) format.
FEM programs will accept non-linear springs
P values in acurve
in a PY Force
must(F)bevs. Deflection
multiplied by the (L)
pileformat. P
length associated with the spring
values in a PY curve must be multiplied by the
in the FEM. pile
This length
converts a Passociated with theunits
value in Force/Length spring in the
to Force. This cannot be
done during dynamic
FEM. This converts a P value in Force/Length units toanalysis
Force. with somecannot
This FEM programs
be done (including
duringGTStrudl).
a
response spectrum analysis with some FEM programs.
Soil Modulus - ES
Soil Modulus is defined as the force per length (of a pile) associated with a soil deflection.
As shown in Figure 7-B3-2, ES is a slope on the PY curve or P/Y. ES is a secant modulus
since the PY relationship is nonlinear and the modulus is a constant. The units are F/L per
Appendix 7-B-2 Non-Linear Springs
L or F/L2, such as kips per square inch. Method III
Subgrade Modulus - kS December 2015
Figure 7-B3-2 Secant Modulus
Soil Modulus - E
A closely related Sterm is the Subgrade Modulus Illustration
(or
SoilModulus
ModulusofisSubgrade
defined asReaction)
the forceprovided
per lengthin(of a
pile) associatedreport.
a geotechnical with a This
soil deflection. As shown
is defined as the soil in
Figure 7-B-2.b,
pressure associatedE is a slope on the PY curve
S with a soil deflection. The orunits
P/Y.
ES is
are a secant
F/L2 per Lmodulus
or F/L3, since
such the PY relationship
as kips is
per cubic inch.
nonlinear and the modulus is a constant. The units are
F/L per L or F/L2, such as kips per square inch.
Subgrade Modulus - kS
A closely related term is the Subgrade Modulus (or
Modulus of Subgrade Reaction) provided in a
Geotechnical Report. This is defined as the soil pressure Secant Modulus Illustration
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual
associated soil deflection. The units are F/L2 per
withM a23-50.19 Figure 7-B-2.b Page 7-127
July 2019
L or F/L3, such as kips per cubic inch.
7.99 References
1. AASHTO (2011) "AASHTO Guide Specification for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design,"
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, Washington,
D.C.
2. ACI (2011) “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary,”
American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI.
3. AISC (2010) “Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings” ANSI/AISC Standard 360-10,
American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL.
4. AISI. American Iron and Steel Institute.
5. Caltrans. (2008). Memo to Designers 3-1 Deep Foundations, California Department
of Transportation, Sacrameto, CA.
6. Hannigan, P. J., Goble, G.G., Likins, G.E., and Rausche, F. (2006). “Design and
Construction of Driven Pile Foundation,” FHWA NHI-05-042, Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C., Vol. I.
7. Roeder, C.W, Lehman, D.E.(2012) Initial Investigation of Reinforced Concrete- filled
Tubes for use in Bridge Foundations, Report No. WA-RD 776.1, Washington State
Transportation Center (TRAC), University of Washington, Seattle, WA.
8. Roeder, C.W., Lehman, D.E., and Bishop, E. (2010) “Strength and Stiffness of Circular
Concrete-filled Tubes," ASCE, Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol 136, No 12, pgs,
1545-53, Reston, VA.
9. Roeder, C.W, Lehman, D.E., and Thody, R. (2009) "Composite Action in CFT
Components and Connections," AISC, Engineering Journal, Chicago, IL.
10. Stephens, M.T, Lehman, D.E, and Roeder, C.W. (2016) “Concrete-Filled Tube Bridge
Pier Connections for Accelerated Bridge Construction.” California Department of
Transportation, Report Number CA15-2417.

July 2019

Chapter7 Substructure Design PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter7 Substructure Design PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter7 Substructure Design PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 7 Substructure Design

7.2 Foundation Modeling for Seismic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7.3 Column Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

7.4 Crossbeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

7.5 Abutment Design and Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

7.6 Abutment Wing Walls and Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

7.7 Footing Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69

7.8 Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79

7.9 Piles and Piling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

7.10 Concrete-Filled Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

7.11 Bridge Standard Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-115

Page 7-ii WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

7.12 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116

7.99 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-128

WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-iii

Page 7-iv WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

7.1 General Substructure Considerations

7.1.1 Foundation Design Process

WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-1

Page 7-2 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

E. Final Foundation Design

7.1.2 Foundation Design Limit States

7.1.3 Seismic Design

7.1.4 Substructure and Foundation Loads

WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-3

Figure 7.1.1-1 Overall Design Process for LRFD Foundation Design

Page 7-4 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

Figure 7.1.4-1 Substructure Directional Forces

7.1.5 Concrete Class for Substructure

WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-5

7.1.6 Foundation Seals

Figure 7.1.6-1 Foundation Seal

A. General Seal Criteria

Page 7-6 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

ii. Construction Time Period Known

WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-7

C. Pile Footing Seals

7.1.7 Scour Requirements

Page 7-8 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

EARTH PRESSURE APPLIED TO

ORIGINAL GROUND CONDITION

EARTH PRESSURE APPLIED TO

ORIGINAL GROUND CONDITION

EARTH PRESSURE APPLIED TO

WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-9

7.2 Foundation Modeling for Seismic Loads

7.2.2 Substructure Elastic Dynamic Analysis Procedure

Page 7-10 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

7.2.3 Bridge Model Section Properties

WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-11

For a soft substructure response:

Use a steel casing

7.2.4 Bridge Model Verification

7.2.5 Deep Foundation Modeling Methods

moment to determine displacement and soil stiffness. Using superposition to

Figure 7.2.5-1 Limitations on the Technique I (Superposition Technique)

Page 7-14 WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19

E. Boundary Conditions (Method II)

WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.19 Page 7-15

7 .3 .6-1 �� 1�3 �� (7.3.2-1)